BORNEO
AND
THE INDIAN ARCHIPELAGO
BY
FRANK S. MARRYAT
On the 25th of January, 1843, H. M.
S. Samarang, being completely equipped, went out of
Portsmouth harbour and anchored at Spithead. The
crew were paid advanced wages; and, five minutes after
the money had been put into their hats at the pay-table,
it was all most dexterously transferred to the pockets
of their wives, whose regard and affection for their
husbands at this peculiar time was most exemplary.
On the following day, the crew of the Samarang made
sail with full hearts and empty pockets.
On the 25th February, sighted Fuerto
Ventura: when off this island, the man at the
mast-head reported a wreck in sight, which, as we neared
it, appeared to be the wreck of a brig. Strange
to say, the captain recognised it as an old acquaintance,
which he had seen off Cape Finisterre on his return
from China in the Sulphur. If this was not a
mistake, it would be evidence of a southerly current
in this quarter of the Atlantic. This may be,
but I do not consider the proof to be sufficient to
warrant the fact; although it may lead to the supposition.
If this was the wreck seen at such a long interval
by the captain, a succession of northerly winds and
gales might have driven it down so far to the southward
without the assistance of any current. It is
well known that the great current of the Atlantic,
the gulf stream (which is occasioned by the waters,
being forced by the continuous trade winds into the
Gulf of Mexico, finding a vent to the northward by
the coast of America, from thence towards Newfoundland,
and then in a more easterly direction), loses its
force, and is expended to the northward of the Western
Islands; and this is the cause why so many rocks have
been yearly reported to have been fallen in with in
this latitude. Wrecks, all over the Atlantic,
which have been water-logged but do not sink, are
borne by the various winds and currents until they
get into the gulf stream, which sweeps them along
in its course until they arrive to where its force
is expended, and there they remain comparatively stationary.
By this time, probably, years have passed, and they
are covered with sea-weeds and barnacles, and, floating
three or four feet out of the water, have every appearance
of rocks; and, indeed, if run upon on a dark night,
prove nearly as fatal.
March 3rd. Anchored off
the town of Porto Praya, Island of St. Jago, in nine
fathoms. Porto Praya is a miserable town, built
on a most unhealthy spot, there being an extensive
marsh behind it, which, from its miasma, creates a
great mortality among the inhabitants. The consul
is a native of Bona Vista: two English consuls
having fallen victims to the climate in quick succession,
no one was found very willing to succeed to such a
certain provision from the Foreign Office. The
interior of the island is, however, very different
from what would be expected from the sight of Porto
Praya. Some of the officers paid a visit to the
valley of St. Domingo, which they described as a perfect
paradise, luxuriant with every tropical fruit.
Porto Praya is renowned for very large sharks.
I was informed by a captain in Her Majesty’s
service, that once, when he anchored at Porto Praya,
he had left the ship to go on shore in one of the
twenty-two-foot gigs, not unaptly nick-named coffins
in the service. He had not pulled more than a
cable’s length from the ship, when a shark,
nearly as long as the gig, came up swimming with great
velocity after them; and as he passed, the animal
shouldered the boat, so as nearly to upset it:
as it was, the boat took in the water over the gunwale.
As the animal appeared preparing for another attack,
the captain thought it advisable to pull alongside,
and go on shore in the cutter instead of his own boat;
and on this large boat the shark did not make a second
attempt.
April 25th. Anchored in
Simon’s Bay, Cape of Good Hope. Sailed again
on the 7th of May, and fell in with a favourable wind;
and too much of it. For six days we were scudding
before it under a close-reefed main-topsail and fore-staysail.
On the 10th we lost one of the best men in the ship,
the sailmaker, Charles Downing, who fell overboard;
the ship was rounded to, the life-buoy let go, but
we saw nothing of him. June 7th saw Christmas
Islands, and on the same afternoon the land of Java.
On the 11th we arrived off the town of Anger, in company
with a fleet of merchant vessels of all nations and
of all rigs. Having been so long without a fresh
meal, we were not sorry to find ourselves surrounded
by boats loaded with fish, fruit, and vegetables; we
ate enormously, and they made us pay in proportion.
On the 19th we arrived at Sincapore,
and found the roads very gay with vessels of all descriptions,
from the gallant free trader of 1000 tons to the Chinese
junk. As Sincapore, as well as many other places,
was more than once visited, I shall defer my description
for the present. On June the 27th we weighed
and made sail for the river of Sarawak (Borneo), to
pay a visit to Mr. Brooke, who resides at Kuchin, a
town situated on that river.
The public have already been introduced
to Mr. Brooke in the volumes published by Captain
Henry Keppel. Mr. Brooke is a gentleman of independent
fortune, who was formerly in the service of the Company.
The usefulness and philanthropy of his public career
are well known: if the private history which
induced him to quit the service, and afterwards expatriate
himself, could with propriety, and also regard to Mr.
Brooke’s feelings, be made known, it would redound
still more to his honour and his high principle; but
these I have no right to make public. Mr. Brooke,
having made up his mind to the high task of civilising
a barbarous people, and by every means in his power
of putting an end to the wholesale annual murders
committed by a nation of pirates, whose hands were,
like Ishmael’s, against every man, sailed from
England in his yacht, the Royalist schooner, with
a crew of picked and tried men, and proceeded to Sarawak,
where he found the rajah, Muda Hassein, the uncle
to the reigning sultan of Borneo, engaged in putting
down the insurrection of various chiefs of the neighbouring
territory. Mr. Brooke, with his small force,
gave his assistance to the rajah; and through his
efforts, and those of his well-armed band, the refractory
chiefs were reduced to obedience. Willing to retain
such a powerful ally, and partial to the English,
the rajah made Mr. Brooke most splendid promises to
induce him to remain; but the rajah, like all Asiatics,
did not fulfil the performance of these promises until
after much delay and vexation to Mr. Brooke, who required
all the courage and patience with which he is so eminently
gifted, before he could obtain his ends. At last
he was successful: Muda Hassein made over to him
a large tract of land, over which he was constituted
rajah, and Mr. Brooke took up his residence at Kuchin;
and this grant was ultimately confirmed by the seal
of the sultan of Borneo. Such, in few words, is
the history of Mr. Brooke: if the reader should
wish for a more detailed account, I must refer him
to Capt. Henry Keppel’s work, in which is
published a great portion of Mr. Brooke’s own
private memoranda.
On the morning of the 29th June we
saw the high land of Borneo, but for several days
were unsuccessful in discovering the mouth of the river.
On the night of July the 4th we anchored off the entrance
of a river, which the captain supposed to be the Sarawak.
The next morning the two barges, well armed, were
sent up the river to obtain information. After
pulling with the stream six or eight miles, they discovered
a small canoe, which, on their approach, retreated
up the river with great speed. Mr. Heard, the
officer in charge of the boats, had taken the precaution,
as he ascended the river, of cutting a palm branch
for each boat, and these were now displayed at the
bows as a sign of peaceable intentions.
These universal tokens of amity reassured
the natives, who, seeing them, now turned the bows
of their canoes, and paddled towards the boats.
The canoe contained four men, almost in a state of
nudity, their only covering consisting of a narrow
slip of cotton fastened round the middle. They
were copper-coloured, and extremely ugly: their
hair jet black, very long, and falling down the back;
eyes were also black, and deeply sunk in the head,
giving a vindictive appearance to the countenance;
nose flattened; mouth very large; the lips of a bright
vermilion, from the chewing of the betel-nut; and,
to add to their ugliness, their teeth black, and filed
to sharp points. Such is the personal appearance
of a Loondoo Dyak.
They informed us that the river we
were then in was the Loondoo, and that the Sarawak
was some distance to the eastward. They also gave
us the information that the boats of the Dido had
been engaged with pirates, and had been successful,
having captured one prahu and sunk another. After
great persuasion, we induced one of them to accompany
us to the ship, and pilot her to the Sarawak.
The same evening we weighed anchor,
and stood towards a remarkable promontory (Tangong
Sipang), to the eastward of which is the principal
entrance of the Sarawak river; a second, but less safe,
entrance being within a mile of the promontory.
Light and variable winds prevented our arrival at
the mouth of the river until the evening of the following
day. From thence, after two days’ incessant
kedging and towing, we anchored off the town of Kuchin,
on the morning of the 8th instant. The town of
Kuchin is built on the left-hand side of the river
Sarawak going up; and, from the windings of the river,
you have to pull twenty-five miles up the river to
arrive at it, whereas it is only five miles from the
coast as the crow flies. It consists of about
800 houses, built on piles driven into the ground,
the sides and roofs being enclosed with dried palm
leaves. Strips of bamboo are laid across, which
serve as a floor. In fact, there is little difference
between these houses and those built by the Burmahs
and other tribes in whose countries bamboo and ratan
are plentiful. The houses of Mr. Brooke and the
rajah are much superior to any others, having the
advantage and comfort of wooden sides and floorings.
We visited the rajah several times, who invariably
received us with urbanity, and entertained us in a
very hospitable manner. Muda Hassein is a man
about fifty years of age, some think more, of
low stature, as are most of the Malays, well made,
and with a very prepossessing countenance for a Malay.
His brother, Budruden, is a much finer man, very agreeable,
and very partial to the English. The Malays profess
Mahomedanism; but Budruden in many points followed
European customs, both in dress and drinking wine.
The residence of Mr. Brooke is on
the side of the river opposite to the town, as, for
the most part, are all the houses of the Europeans.
In structure it somewhat resembles a Swiss cottage,
and is erected upon a green mound, which slopes down
to the river’s bank, where there is a landing-place
for boats. At the back of the house is a garden,
containing almost every tree peculiar to the climate;
and it was a novelty to us to see collected together
the cotton-tree, the areca, sago, palm, &c., with
every variety of the Camellia japonica in a state
of most luxurious wildness.
The establishment consists of six
Europeans, and the house contains one large receiving-room,
and several smaller ones, appropriated to the residents
as sleeping apartments, besides Mr. Brooke’s
own private rooms. The large room is decorated
with rifles, swords, and other instruments of warfare,
European and native; and it is in this room that the
European rajah gives his audiences: and it is
also in this room that every day, at five o’clock,
a capital dinner is served up, to which we were made
heartily welcome. During our stay, Mr. Brooke,
accompanied by several of our officers and some of
the residents, made an excursion up the river.
We started early in the morning, with a flowing tide;
and, rapidly sweeping past the suburbs of the town,
which extend some distance up the river, we found
ourselves gliding through most interesting scenery.
On either side, the river was bounded by gloomy forests,
whose trees feathered down to the river’s bank,
the water reflecting their shadows with peculiar distinctness.
Occasionally the scene was diversified by a cleared
spot amidst this wilderness, where, perchance, a half-ruined
hut, apparently not inhabited for years, the remains
of a canoe, together with fragments of household utensils,
were to be seen, proving that once it had been the
abode of those who had been cut off by some native
attack, and probably the heads of its former occupants
were now hanging up in some skull-house belonging to
another tribe. The trees were literally alive
with monkeys and squirrels, which quickly decamped
as we approached them. Several times we were startled
by the sudden plunge of the alligators into the water,
close to the boats, and of whose propinquity we were
not aware until they made the plunge. All these
rivers are infested with alligators, and I believe
they are very often mischievous; at all events, one
of our youngsters was continually in a small canoe,
paddling about, and the natives cautioned us that
if he was not careful he certainly would be taken by
one of these animals.
Early in the afternoon we disembarked
at a Chinese village twenty-five miles from Kuchin.
The inhabitants of this village work the gold and
antimony mines belonging to Mr. Brooke. We remained
there for the night, and the next morning proceeded
further up the river, and landed at another village,
where we breakfasted, and then proceeded on foot to
visit the mines. Our path lay through dense forests
of gigantic trees, whose branches met and interlaced
overhead, shading us from the burning rays of the
sun. At times we would emerge from the wood, and
find ourselves passing through cultivated patches
of ravines, enclosed on all sides by lofty mountains,
covered with foliage. In these spots we found
a few natives with their families, who seemed to be
contented in their perfect isolation; for in these
secluded spots generations may pass away, and know
no world beyond their own confines of forest jungle.
At times our route was over mountains, whose appearance
was so formidable that our hearts almost failed us
at the prospect of having to scale them; but we succeeded
beyond our expectations, and at length arrived at
the antimony village, not a little pleased at our labours
being ended. Our spirits, which had been flagging,
were revived by a pull at the bottle. From our
resting-place we had a good view of the mine, which
is a source of great profit to Mr. Brooke. The
antimony is obtained from the side of a hill, the
whole of which is supposed to be formed of this valuable
mineral. The side at which the men are at work
shines like silver during the day, and may be seen
several miles distant, strangely contrasting with
the dark foliage of the adjoining jungles. The
ore is conveyed to Kuchin, and is there shipped on
board of the Royalist, (Mr. Brooke’s schooner
yacht,) and taken to Sincapore, where it is eagerly
purchased by the merchants, and shipped for England.
After partaking of a little refreshment
we set off, through woods and over mountains, as before,
to visit the gold mine. On our arrival at every
village on the road, a certain number of guns were
fired by the natives, in honour of the European rajah;
and the same ceremony was repeated when we left it.
It was late in the afternoon before we arrived at
the village attached to the gold mine. It is prettily
situated in the depth of a valley, through which runs
a small rivulet.
On every side mountains soar into
the clouds, which must be passed before you can reach
the village. Dinner had been prepared for us by
the inhabitants of the village, who were a colony
of Chinese; and it was served up in a large building
dedicated to Joss, whose shrine was brilliantly illuminated
with candles and joss-sticks. Some of the officers
unthinkingly lighted their cigars at the altar.
The Chinese, observing it, requested very civilly
that they would do so no more; a request which was,
of course, complied with. After dinner we all
proceeded to the rivulet, in search of gold; the natives
had cleared out the bed of the river; the sand and
stones were thrown into an artificial sluice for washing
it; and a little gold was found by some of the party.
This gold mine, if it may be so called, is worth to
Mr. Brooke about 1000l. per annum, after all the expenses
are paid. Its real value is much greater; but
the Chinese conceal a great quantity, and appropriate
it to themselves. But if the particles of gold
which are brought down by a small rivulet are of such
value, what may be the value of the mines above, in
the mountains as yet untrodden by human feet?
This, it is to be hoped, enterprise will some day
reveal.
We remained at the village that night,
and at daylight commenced our journey back to the
village from which we had started the day before.
There we embarked, and proceeded down the river to
the first Chinese village, at which we arrived in
the course of the afternoon. A short distance
inland is a mountain, called Sarambo, which it was
proposed to ascend, as, by our telescopes, we could
perceive houses near to its summit, and were told
it was the residence of some of the mountain Dyaks
under Mr. Brooke’s sway. From the village
this mountain wore the appearance of a huge sugar-loaf,
and its sides appeared inaccessible. Mr. Brooke,
with his usual kindness, gave his consent, and despatched
a messenger to the Dyak village, requesting the chief
to send a party down by daylight the next morning,
to convey our luggage up the mountain. At day-dawn
we were awakened by a confused noise outside of the
house, and, looking out, we perceived that more than
a score of these mountain Dyaks had arrived.
Most of them had nothing on but the usual strip of
cotton; some few had on red baize jackets. They
all wore a peculiar kind of kris, and many
had spears, sampitans, and shields. They were
fine-limbed men, with muscles strongly developed.
Their hair fell down their backs, and nearly reached
their middle: it was prevented from falling over
the face by a fillet of grass, which was ornamented
with mountain flowers.
After a hurried breakfast we set off
for the foot of the mountain, our party amounting
to about eighty people. The guides led the way,
followed by the Europeans; and the Dyaks, with the
luggage, brought up the rear. In this order we
commenced the ascent. Each person was provided
with a bamboo, which was found indispensable; and
thus, like a party of pilgrims, we proceeded on our
way; and before we had gone very far, we discovered
that we were subjected to severe penance. The
mountain was nearly perpendicular. In some places
we had to ascend by a single piece of wood, with rough
notches for the feet, resting against a rock twenty
or thirty feet above our heads; and on either side
was a precipice, so that a false step must have been
certain death. In other places a single piece
of bamboo was thrown over a frightful chasm, by way
of bridge. This, with a slight bamboo rail for
the hand, was all that we had to trust to. The
careful manner in which we passed these dangers was
a source of great laughter and amusement to the Dyaks
who followed us. Accustomed from infancy to tread
these dangerous paths, although heavily laden, they
scorned to support themselves. Some of our party
were nearly exhausted, and a long way in the rear
before we came to the village. We had to wait
for their coming up, and threw ourselves under the
shade of some huge trees, that we might contemplate
the bird’s-eye view beneath. It was a sight
which must be seen to be appreciated. Almost as
far as the eye could reach was one immense wooded
plain, bounded by lofty mountains in the far distance,
whose tops pierced the clouds. The rivers appeared
like silver threads, running through the jungles; now
breaking off, and then regained. At our feet
lay the village we had started from, the houses of
which appeared like mere points. Shakspeare Cliff
was as nothing to it, and his beautiful lines would
have fallen very short of the mark; and while we gazed,
suddenly a cloud below us would pass between us and
the view, and all would be hidden from the sight.
Thus we were far above the clouds, and then the clouds
would break, and open, and pass and repass over each
other, until, like the dissolving views, all was clear
again, although the landscape was not changed.
It was towards noon before we saw the first mountain
village, which we did not immediately enter, as we
waited the arrival of the laggards: we stopped,
therefore, at a spring of cold water, and enjoyed a
refreshing wash. Here we fell in with some pretty
Dyak girls, very scantily clothed, who were throwing
water at each other in sport. We soon came in
for a plentiful share, which we returned with interest;
and in this amusing combat we passed half an hour,
until all had joined the party. We then entered
the village, which was situated in a grove of trees.
The houses were built upon posts, as those down by
the river side. They were immensely large, with
a bamboo platform running the whole length of the
building, and divided into many compartments, in each
of which a Dyak family resides. We were escorted,
through a crowd of wondering Dyaks, to a house in
the centre of the village, which was very different
in construction from the others. It was perfectly
round, and well ventilated by numerous port-holes
in the roof, which was pointed. We ascended to
the room above by means of a rough ladder, and when
we entered we were rather taken aback at finding that
we were in the Head House, as it is termed, and that
the beams were lined with human heads, all hanging
by a small line passed through the top of the skull.
They were painted in the most fantastic and hideous
manner; pieces of wood, painted to imitate the eyes,
were inserted into the sockets, and added not a little
to their ghastly grinning appearance. The strangest
part of the story, and which added very much to the
effect of the scene, was, that these skulls were perpetually
moving to and fro, and knocking against, each other.
This, I presume, was occasioned by the different currents
of air blowing in at the port-holes cut in the roof;
but what with their continual motion, their nodding
their chins when they hit each other, and their grinning
teeth, they really appeared to be endowed with new
life, and were a very merry set of fellows. However,
whatever might be the first impression occasioned
by this very unusual sight, it very soon wore off,
and we amused ourselves with those motions which were
“not life,” as Byron says; and, in the
course of the day, succeeded in making a very excellent
dinner in company with these gentlemen, although we
were none of us sufficiently Don Giovannis to invite
our friends above to supper. We visited three
villages on the Sarambo mountain. Each of these
villages was governed by a chief of its own, but they
were subordinate to the great chief, residing in the
first village.
In the evening the major portion of
the population came to the Head House, to exhibit
to us their national dances. The music was composed
of two gongs and two large bamboo drums. The
men stood up first, in war costume, brandishing their
spears and shields, and throwing themselves into the
most extraordinary attitudes, as they cut with their
knives at some imaginary enemy; at the same time uttering
the most unearthly yells, in which the Dyak spectators
joined, apparently highly delighted with the exhibition.
The women then came forward, and went through a very
unmeaning kind of dance, keeping time with their hands
and feet; but still it was rather a relief after the
noise and yelling from which we had just suffered.
The chief, Macuta, expressing a wish to see a specimen
of our dancing, not to let them suppose we were not
as warlike as themselves, two of the gig’s boat’s
crew stood up, and went through the evolutions of
the broad-sword exercise in a very creditable manner.
After this performance one of the seamen danced the
sailor’s hornpipe, which brought forth a torrent
of yells instead of bravos, but they certainly meant
the same thing. By this time, the heat from a
large fire, with the smell of humanity in so crowded
a room, became so overpowering, that I was glad to
leave the Head House to get a little fresh air, and
my ears relieved from the dinning of the drums and
gongs. It was a beautiful starry night, and,
strolling through the village, I soon made acquaintance
with a native Dyak, who requested me to enter his
house. He introduced me to his family, consisting
of several fine girls and a young lad. The former
were naked from the shoulders to below the breasts,
where a pair of stays, composed of several circles
of whalebone, with brass fastenings, were secured
round their waists; and to the stays was attached
a cotton petticoat, reaching to below their knees.
This was the whole of their attire. They were
much shorter than European women, but well made; very
interesting in their appearance, and affable and friendly
in their manners. Their eyes were dark and piercing,
and I may say there was something wicked in their furtive
glances; their noses were but slightly flattened; the
mouth rather large; but when I beheld the magnificent
teeth which required all its size to display, I thought
this rather an advantage. Their hair was superlatively
beautiful, and would have been envied by many a courtly
dame. It was jet black, and of the finest texture,
and hung in graceful masses down the back, nearly
reaching to the ground. A mountain Dyak girl,
if not a beauty, has many most beautiful points; and,
at all events, is very interesting and, I may say,
pretty. They have good eyes, good teeth, and
good hair; more than good: I may say
splendid; and they have good manners, and
know how to make use of their eyes. I shall,
therefore, leave my readers to form their own estimates
by my description. Expecting to meet some natives
in my ramble, I had filled my pockets with ship’s
biscuit, and which I now distributed among the ladies,
who appeared very grateful, as they rewarded me, while
they munched it, by darting wicked glances from their
laughing eyes.
Observing that the lad wore a necklace
of human teeth round his neck, his father explained
to me, in pantomime, that they were the teeth of an
enemy whom he slew in battle, and whose head was now
in the Head House.
As it was getting late I bade my new
friends farewell, by shaking hands all round.
The girls laughed immoderately at this way of bidding
good-bye, which, of course, was to them quite novel.
I regretted afterwards that I had not attempted the
more agreeable way of bidding ladies farewell, which,
I presume, they would have understood better; as I
believe kissing is an universal language, perfectly
understood from the equator to the pole.
At daylight the next morning we descended
the mountain, and, embarking in the boats, arrived
at the ship late in the afternoon.
While at Sarawak we witnessed a very
strange ceremony. Hearing a great noise in a
house, we entered, and found ourselves in a large room
crowded to excess by a numerous assemblage, singing
in any thing but harmony. They proved to be natives
of Java, assembled for the purpose of celebrating
one of their festivals. On our entrance into the
house, we were literally covered by the inmates with
perfumes of the most delightful fragrance. Some
of these odours were in a liquid state, and were poured
down our backs, or upon our heads; others were in a
state of powder, with which we were plentifully besprinkled.
We were then escorted into the centre of the room,
where we found a circle of elderly men, who were reading
portions of their sacred books, and their voices were
accompanied by music from instruments of native manufacture.
We were treated with great attention, being permitted
to enter the circle of the elders, who ordered the
attendants to hand us refreshments, which consisted
of cakes made of rice and cocoa-nut oil, and Sam-schoo.
Some of our party, having become slightly elevated,
volunteered a song, which proposition was opposed
by the more reasonable. The Javanese were appealed
to by the former, and they gave their votes in favour
of the song. It was accordingly sung by our whole
party, much to the delight of our kind entertainers,
who, no doubt, considered that we felt and appreciated
their rites. At length we took our leave, well
pleased with our novel entertainment. So well
did we succeed in making ourselves agreeable, that
we received an invitation for the following night.
July 10th. In the evening
a display of fireworks took place, notice of which
had been given to the rajah, and, indeed, to the whole
population of Kuchin, who had all assembled near to
the ship, to witness what they considered a most wonderful
sight. Seamen were stationed at all the yard-arms,
flying jib, and driver booms, with blue-lights, which
were fired simultaneously with the discharge of a
dozen rockets, and the great gun of a royal salute.
The echoes reverberated for at least a minute after
the last gun of the salute had been fired; and, judging
by the yells of the natives, the display must have
created a strong sensation. Immediately after
the salute, the anchor was weighed, and we commenced
dropping down the river with the ebb tide; but we soon
grounded on the mud, and we remained all night with
the bowsprit in the bushes which grow on the banks
of the river.
The ship floated the next morning;
the anchor was weighed, and with the assistance of
the ebb tide, we dropped down the river at the rate
of five miles per hour. As we were nearing a
cluster of dangerous rocks, about a mile below Kuchin,
we found that the ship was at the mercy of the rapid
tide; and, notwithstanding all our endeavours, the
ship struck on the rocks. Anchors were immediately
laid out, but to no effect: the water rapidly
shallowed, and we gave up all thoughts of getting off
until the next flood tide. As the water left the
ship, she fell over to starboard, and, an hour after
she had grounded, she listed to starboard 25 degrees.
Our position was now becoming critical: the main
deck ports had been shipped some time previous, but
this precaution did not prevent the water from gaining
entrance on the main and lower decks. As she
still continued to heel over to starboard, a hawser
was taken on shore, and, by purchases, set taut to
the mast head; but before this could be accomplished
she had filled so much that it proved useless.
A boat was now despatched to Kuchin,
to acquaint Mr. Brooke with our disaster, and to request
the assistance of the native boats. During the
absence of the boats, the top-gallant-masts had been
sent down, and topmasts lowered; but the ship was
now careening over 46 degrees, and full of water.
All hopes of getting her off were therefore, for the
present, abandoned; and we commenced removing every
thing that could be taken out of her in the boats.
The surveying instruments and other valuables, were
sent up to Kuchin in the gig; and afterwards every
thing that could be obtained from the ship was brought
up in the native boats, as well as the whole crew
of the Samarang. Mr. Brooke insisted upon all
the officers making a temporary abode at his house,
and prepared a shed for the crew. An excellent
dinner was laid before the officers, while a substantial
mess of fowls and rice was served out to the crew.
In fact, the kindness of Mr. Brooke was beyond all
bounds. The gentlemen who resided with him, as
well as himself, provided us with clothes from their
own wardrobes, and during our protracted stay did all
in their power to make us comfortable; indeed, I may
safely say, that we were so happy and comfortable,
that there were but very few of the officers and crew
of the Samarang that ever wished to see her afloat
again. But I must return to my narrative.
The morning after our disaster we
went down to the ship, and commenced recovering provisions
and stores, sending down masts and yards, and every
other article deemed necessary; and this was continued
for several days: during which the midshipmen,
petty officers, and seamen were removed to the opposite
shore, where two houses had been, by Mr. Brooke, prepared
for their reception. Our house, (the midshipmen’s)
we christened Cockpit Hall; it was very romantically
situate in the middle of a plantation of cocoa nut,
palm, banana, and plantain trees. It was separated
from the house in which the seamen were barracked by
a small kind of jungle, not more than 300 yards in
extent, but so intricate that we constantly lost our
way in it, and had to shout and receive an answer,
or go back and take a fresh departure. Our garden,
in which there was a delightful spring of cold water,
extended on a gentle slope about a hundred yards in
front of the house, where its base was watered by
a branch of the Sarawak; in which we refreshed ourselves
by bathing morning and evening, in spite of the numerous
alligators and water snakes with which the river abounds.
But our incautious gambols received a check.
Two of our party agreed to proceed to the mouth of
the branch I have mentioned, to determine which could
return with the greatest speed. They had commenced
their swimming race, when we, who stood ashore as
umpires, observed an enormous water snake, with head
erect, making for the two swimmers. We cried
out to them to hasten on shore, which they did; while
we kept up a rapid discharge of stones at the head
of the brute, who was at last driven off in another
direction. This incident induced us to be more
cautious, and to keep within safe boundary for the
future.
Our repose at Cockpit Hall was, however,
much disturbed by the nightly visits of wild hogs,
porcupines, wild cats, guanos, and various other
animals, some of which made dreadful noises. When
they paid us their visits, we all turned out, and,
armed with muskets, commenced an assault upon them,
which soon caused them to evacuate our domain; but
similar success did not attend our endeavours to dislodge
the swarms of musquitos, scorpions, lizards, and centipedes
from our habitations. They secreted themselves
in the thatch, and the sides of the house during the
day, and failed not to disturb with their onslaughts
during the whole of the night.
July 22d. Mr. Hooper, the
purser, was despatched in the Royalist to Sincapore,
to purchase provisions and obtain assistance from any
of the men-of-war who might be lying in the roads.
It is not necessary to enter into
a minute detail of the service which we were now employed
upon. It certainly was not a service of love,
as we had to raise a ship which we hoped would remain
where she was. To enter into particulars, technical
terms must be resorted to, which would only puzzle
the reader. The position of the Samarang was simply
this: she lay on a rock, and had filled by careening
over; as long as she was on her side, the water rose
and fell in her with the flood and ebb of the tide;
but if once we could get her on an even keel, as soon
as the water left her with the ebb of the tide, all
we had to do was to pump her out, and then she would
float again. To effect this, we had to lighten
her as much as possible, by taking out of her her
guns and stores of every description; then to get
purchases on her from the shore, and assist the purchases
with rafts under her bilge, so as to raise her again
upon an even keel. On the second day after she
filled, when the tide had run out, we removed all
our chests from the lower deck; most of them were
broken, and a large proportion of the contents missing.
On the 27th May every thing had been prepared, and
the attempt to get the vessel on an even keel was
made, and it proved successful, as it well might with
the variety of purchases, and the force of men we
had at our disposition. When we repaired to the
ship with 100 Malays to man the purchase-falls, the
tide was ebbing fast, and the pumps were immediately
set to work; so that at midnight, when the tide commenced
flowing, the ship was nearly free of water. The
purchases were then manned, and with the assistance
of the rafts the ship gradually righted. The following
day, about half-past two in the morning, the ship
was free of water, and had risen to a careen of 30
deg.; at 3 o’clock she floated into deep
water, and was then anchored. During the forenoon
of the same day the ship was towed to her former anchoring
ground off Kuchin. The same night the Harlequin
and Royalist arrived in the river, and a day or two
afterwards a brig and schooner came over with the
intention of bidding for the remains of the ship,
and of stocking the officers with clothes and necessaries.
This was a losing speculation, as may be imagined,
arising from a report having been circulated that
it was impossible to raise the ship, whereas, as the
reader will perceive, there was very little difficulty
in so doing, nothing but sufficient strength being
required.
Our ship, as may be supposed, was
in a most filthy state after the late immersion.
Plunging into a river does not clean a vessel, although
it does a man. The decks were literally coated
with mud and slime, which emitted the most foetid
odour. Silver spoons, watches, and valuables of
every description, were everywhere strewed about, few
of which ever reached their rightful owners; for the
Malays who were employed to clean the ship had an
eye to business, and secreted every thing which was
portable. By dint of great exertion, the ship
was in a few days ready to receive her tanks, guns,
and stores, which were embarked by the Harlequin’s
boats and boats’ crews. She was soon in
a forward state, and an expedition was formed to survey
a part of the coast during the completion of her refitting.
The gig and one of the barges were fitted out for
this service, and on August the 13th, at daylight,
we left Kuchin, well armed, and provisioned for ten
days. At 10 A. M. we dropped anchor under the
Peak of Santabong, from which the branch of the Sarawak
we were then in derives its name. Here we remained
a short time to refresh the men, who had not ceased
tugging at the oar from the time that we started.
The foot of the Santabong mountain is about a quarter
of a mile from the river. It then ascends almost
perpendicularly to a great height, towering far above
the neighbouring mountains. Afterwards it runs
seaward for a mile or two, and terminates in a remarkable
peak, which forms the eastern horn of the extensive
bay between it and Tanjon Datu. Here we were
about a week, during which time we had extended our
survey to the last-mentioned cape, which is about forty
miles to the westward of Santabong. While in
the vicinity of Datu, a strict watch was kept, that
we might have timely notice of the approach of any
prahus. A short distance from the cape is a delightful
bay studded with small islets, which is known by the
appellation of Pirate’s Bay, so called from
its being a favourite resort of the Illanoan pirates.
It was in this bay that the Dido’s boats were
anchored when they were surprised by several piratical
prahus, the look-out men in the European boats, exhausted
by the heat and long pulling at the oar, having fallen
asleep. They had scarcely time to cut the cables
and grasp their weapons ere they were assailed on
all sides by the pirates, who felt confident of success,
from having found them napping. But they little
knew what people they had to deal with, and if Jack
was asleep when they made the attack, they found him
wide awake when they came to close quarters. All
their endeavours to board in the face of the rapid
fire of the boats’ guns and small arms proved
abortive, and they soon discovered that it would be
quite sufficient for their purpose if, instead of capturing
the boats, they could make their own escape.
One of the prahus, pierced by the well-directed shot,
foundered, another was abandoned, and the rest, favoured
by darkness, made their escape. For a more detailed
account, I must refer the reader to Captain Keppel’s
work on Borneo.
During the survey, we visited the
islands of Talen Talen the Malay word for
turtle. These islands are the property of Mr.
Brooke. A few Malays lived on the largest of
them for the purpose of getting turtle eggs, with
which they supply the trading prahus, who continually
call here to lay in a stock of these eggs, which are
considered a great luxury by the Malays. We landed
with Mr. Williamson, the Malay interpreter at Sarawak,
belonging to Mr. Brooke’s establishment.
We were well received by the Malays, who knew Mr.
Williamson well, and he informed them that our object
was to procure a live turtle. They requested us
to take our choice of the numerous turtle then lying
on the beach. We selected one of about three
cwt.; but although the turtles are never turned on
this island, she appeared to be aware that such was
our intention, and scuttled off as fast as she could
for the water; however, we intercepted her, and with
some difficulty secured our prize. From one of
the numerous nests on the beach we took 600 turtle
eggs. As many thousands could have been as easily
procured, but we had sufficient for our wants.
The Malays watch during the night, to ascertain where
the turtle deposits her eggs, for as soon as she has
finished her task, she covers them with her nippers
with sand, and immediately retires into the sea.
A piece of wood is then set up as a mark for the nest,
which is rifled as occasion requires. It is a
curious fact that the male turtle never lands.
After visiting several villages on
the coast, we returned to Kuchin on Saturday the 19th,
when we found that death had deprived us of our only
musician on board the ship, a loss which was much felt
by the crew, as he contributed much to their amusement.
One of the supernumerary boys had also fallen a victim
to the dysentery; but, although we deplored our loss,
we had great reason to be thankful that it had been
no greater, as on the day we left Kuchin, we had upwards
of seventy men on the sick report. The same day,
at noon, the anchor was weighed, and we dropped down
the river with the ebb tide. Strange to say, in
spite of all our precautions, we struck on the same
reef of rocks again; fortunately, however, the ship
turned with the tide and grounded in the mud close
to the bushes, from whence there was no extricating
her till the flood tide had made. In the afternoon,
when it was low water, a very large alligator was
discovered asleep upon the rocks, which had been properly
christened the Samarang Rocks, and which were now,
at low ebb, several feet above water. A party
of officers and marines pulled towards him, and fired
a volley at him. The brute was evidently wounded,
as he sprang up several feet in the air, and then
disappeared under the water. Shortly after he
again made his appearance, having landed on the opposite
side of the river; his assailants again gave chase,
and again wounded him, but he shuffled into the river
and escaped.
At three in the afternoon, we were
much pleased at the arrival of the Diana, one of the
Company’s steamers, sent from Sincapore to our
assistance. She proved extremely useful, for that
night we gained fifteen miles, when we again grounded
and remained all night. On the following day,
at eleven A. M., a cloud of thick smoke was observed
rising above the jungle, which we immediately decided
to proceed from a steamer. Shortly afterwards
two masts appeared above the trees, and at one of
them the Vixen’s number was flying: she
soon hove in sight. We weighed, and with the
Harlequin, were towed down the river at a rapid pace.
When we arrived at the entrance we anchored, finding
there the Wanderer, and being joined soon afterwards
by the Ariel, Royalist, and Diana, we formed a squadron
of six vessels.
On the 23d August, the Samarang, Harlequin,
Ariel, and Royalist, weighed anchor and steered along
the coast for Borneo Proper, where we arrived on Tuesday
the 29th. On the Thursday following, Mr. Brooke,
accompanied by the captains of the three men-of-war
and some officers, started in one of the barges for
the city of Bruni, which was about eighteen miles
from our anchorage. They had an audience with
the sultan, but upon what cause I do not exactly know.
They were treated with great civility, and returned
to the ship about one o’clock on the following
morning. My description of Bruni I shall reserve
for a future visit. On the 5th of September we
made sail for Hong Kong, with the Vixen in company,
leaving the Ariel and Royalist to carry Mr. Brooke
and the rajah’s brother down to Sarawak.
The Harlequin sailed for Sincapore. The Vixen
having parted company to obtain fuel at Manilla, we
continued our course to Hong Kong, where we arrived
on the 14th inst., and found there Admirals Parker
and Cochrane, in their respective ships the Cornwallis
and Agincourt, with others of the squadron. We
sailed again on the 2d of November, and after working
up the coast of China for a week, we steered to the
eastward, and on the 12th sighted the Bashee group.
Here our surveying duties commenced in earnest, as
we left the ship at four A. M. and did not return
till darkness put an end to our labours. The governor
of this group of islands sent a letter to our captain
requesting the pleasure of seeing the ship in San
Domingo Bay, where wood, water, and live stock could
be obtained on reasonable terms. This letter was
accompanied with a present of fruit and vegetables.
A few days afterwards, we worked up to San Domingo
Bay (Batan Island), and we were much surprised
on our arrival to perceive that the town had a cathedral,
of apparently ancient architecture, besides several
houses built on the European style. The remainder
of the town, which is of some extent, was composed
of houses built of bamboo, and thatched with palm
leaves.
We anchored late in the afternoon,
and were boarded by a Spanish military officer, who,
to judge by certain signs and peculiarities, had been
imbibing something stronger than water. The captain
and some of the officers went on shore, to call upon
the governor. The governor’s house was
distinguished by a flag-staff, with the Spanish colours,
or, rather, a remnant of the Spanish colours; and
around the door stood a group of most indifferently
clad Luzonian soldiers, turned out, we presumed, as
a guard of honour. The governor was as much in
dishabille as his troops, and shortly afterwards the
party was joined by two priests and the governor’s
wife, a very pretty Creole, about twenty years of
age. We were regaled with wine and chocolate,
and parted late in the evening, on very friendly terms.
The governor’s house is a miserable abode:
it has but one story, and the basement is a barrack
for the soldiers. The upper part, inhabited by
the governor, was very scantily furnished: a
few old chairs, a couple of tables, and the walls
whitewashed and decorated with prints of the Virgin
Mary and his excellency’s patron saint.
The house of the priests, which adjoined the cathedral,
was in much better repair, and more gaudy in the inside.
There are three missions in Batan,
each settlement having its cathedral and officiating
priests. The natives, who are a distinct race,
are well-proportioned, of a copper colour, and medium
stature. They are very ugly: their hair
is black, and cut short. Their usual dress consists
of a piece of cotton, passed round the loins, and
a peculiar-looking conical hat, surmounted with a
tuft of goat’s hair. In rainy weather they
wear a cloak of rushes, through which the water cannot
penetrate. The sole covering of the women is
a piece of cotton, fastened below the bosom, and reaching
down to the knee. Almost the whole of the Bashee
group of islands are very mountainous. At the
back of San Domingo the land rises to a great height,
forming a remarkable peak, which can be seen many
leagues distant. Bullocks, goats, pigs, and vegetables,
can be obtained at a very moderate price; but very
little fruit is grown, the natives usually preferring
to cultivate yams, cocoas, and sweet potatoes.
The sugar-cane is cultivated, and the tobacco grown
here is considered, with great justice, far superior
to any grown at Luzon. After a week’s stay
at San Domingo we ran down to Ivana, one of the missions,
and made a rough survey of the bay. The mission
house at this place was fitted up with every comfort,
and we even found luxuries which we looked in vain
for at San Domingo.
After completing the survey of this
portion of the island, the governor (who had accompanied
us from San Domingo) and a party of us set off to
return to San Domingo by land. Our path lay over
mountains nearly 2000 feet in height, from the summit
of which every point and inlet could be discerned,
over the whole of the group which lay below, exactly
as if they were laid down on a chart. Our walk
was very fatiguing, and we were all rejoiced when,
from an eminence, we descried the village of San Carlos,
the residence of the warm-hearted and hospitable Father
Nicholas. We descended into the vale, and were
heartily welcomed by the jolly old priest, who regaled
us with all that his larder could supply us.
It had been arranged that the ship should leave Ivana
for San Domingo on the following morning. At
the entreaty of the good padre we remained at San
Carlos all night, and the following morning returned
to San Domingo, the ship anchoring in the bay on the
same afternoon. We had now become quite domesticated
with the friendly Spaniards. In the evenings
we were received by an assemblage of the natives at
the governor’s house. They were dressed
in their best, and went through an unmeaning dance,
which was kept up till a late hour.
On the 27th November we left Batan,
and its kind inhabitants, who exacted a promise that
we would return at some future period, and shaped
a course for the Madjicosima islands, which are subject
to the kingdom of Loo Choo. On the afternoon
of the 1st of December land was discovered ahead,
and a few hours afterwards we anchored in a narrow
passage, surrounded by reefs on every side. We
were anchored off the island of Pa-tchu-san,
one of the group: it was very mountainous.
On the following morning the captain and some of the
officers went on shore. They were received by
several hundred natives, who saluted them as they passed
on their way to a temporary shed, where a levee was
held by all the principal mandarins. Our Chinese
interpreter, who was a native of Canton, explained
the captain’s wishes, and the nature of the service
that we were employed on. They appeared uneasy
at the proposal of our surveying the whole group,
and informed the captain that they would refer the
question to the viceroy, and give him a final answer
on the morrow. This answer was in the affirmative,
and a few days afterwards we commenced our survey
of the islands. We were attended by the natives,
who furnished us with horses, and anticipated our wishes
in every thing that could make us comfortable.
On the first day, at sunset, we arrived at a temple
dedicated to Fo, romantically situated in a grove of
trees, which concealed the elevation until you were
within a few yards of it. Here it was proposed
to take up our quarters for the night, and a more
delightful spot could not well be imagined than our
resting-place.
The temple was built at the foot of
a hill, within a few hundred yards of the sea.
Lights were displayed as a signal to the stragglers,
groups of whom might be seen by the light of the moon,
reposing themselves on the ridge behind us. The
glare of the torches brought them all down to us,
both men and horses anxious for rest after the arduous
toil of the day. Just as I was dropping off to
sleep, one of my messmates said to another, “I
say, Jemmy, I wonder whether your mother has any idea
that you are sleeping in the temple of Fo, on the
island of Pa-tchu-san?” A loud snore was
the only reply, proving that the party addressed was
unconscious of the island Pa-tchu-san, the temple
of Fo, or of his mother, and the bells ringing for
church.
Pa-tchu-san, as I have before
observed, is very mountainous and exceedingly picturesque.
A high ridge covered with trees extends the whole
length of the island, north and south. On either
side of this ridge are innumerable grassy knolls and
mounds from which we looked down upon the extensive
plain on either side, which was studded with knolls
similar to those that we were standing on. During
our survey we passed through all the villages bordering
the sea, at the entrance of which we were invariably
received by all the principal inhabitants. All
their villages or towns are surrounded by the most
luxurious groves, which have been apparently planted,
for in many parts not a shrub could be seen beyond
the confines of the town. The roads through the
towns or streets generally meet at right angles, lined
on each side with gigantic trees. The houses
are built within enclosures raised with huge stones.
These houses are strongly built, the frame being composed
of four uprights of large timber, to which are attached
cross pieces on the top of them, of the same dimensions
as their supporters. Openings are left on each
side of the house, which, when the owner pleases, can
be closed by well-fitted shutters on the sliding principle.
The roofs are thatched with paddy stalks. The
floor frame is raised about two feet from the ground,
and on it are fixed strong slips of bamboo, which are
covered over with mats. These afford very comfortable
sitting and sleeping apartments. The only inconvenience
was, that the fire was made in the corner of the sitting-room,
and as there was no vent for the smoke, we were nearly
stifled. This nuisance was, however, soon removed
by a word to the natives through the medium of the
interpreter, and afterwards the fire was lighted,
and the victuals cooked, at an adjoining shed.
The natives of the Madjicosima islands
are rather below the middle stature, but very strong
and muscular. Their hair is worn in a very peculiar
manner; the crown of the head is shaved, leaving a
circle of long hair, which is turned up on the top
of the head and tied into a knot of a peculiar shape.
Through this knot of hair are passed two brass ornaments
by the common people, but the chiefs are distinguished
by silver ones. These are evidently intended
to keep the knot in its right position. They
cultivate the moustache and the beard, the latter being
worn pointed. Their dress consists of a long loose
robe of blue or cross-barred cotton stuffs, which
reaches down nearly to the ancles. This robe
is fastened to the waist by a girdle of the same material,
and in which they keep their fans, pipes, &c.
The sleeves of the robe are very large, widening as
they approach the wrists, which are consequently bare.
Their shoes or sandals are very ingeniously made of
wicker work, and confined to the foot by means of
a strap between the larger toes of each foot.
The inhabitants of these islands certainly
deserve to be ranked among the most gentle and amiable
of nations: no boisterousness attends their conversation,
no violent gestures to give effect to the words; on
the contrary, their voices are modulated when they
are speaking, and their actions, although decided,
are gentle. Their mode of salutation is graceful
in the extreme. It consists in a low bending of
the head, accompanied with a slight inclination of
the body, and the hands closed, being raised at the
same time to the forehead. What a change in a
few degrees of latitude, in manners, customs, and
dispositions, between the savage pirates of Borneo
and these amiable islanders!
The plains between the mountains are
cultivated as paddy fields: the soil appears
very good, and there is little doubt but that every
kind of fruit would grow if introduced into these
islands; and what a fitting present it would be to
them, if they were to be sent. They grow radishes,
onions, and sweet potatoes, but not more than are sufficient
for their own use. They supplied us with bullocks,
pigs, goats, and fowls, but they seldom kill them
for their own use; their principal diet being composed
of shell fish and vegetables made into a sort of stew,
which is eaten with rice, worked by the hand into balls.
Every man of consequence carries with him a kind of
portable larder, which is a box with a shelf in the
middle, and a sliding door. In this are put cups
of Japan, containing the eatables. This Chow
Chow box is carried by a servant, who also takes with
him a wicker basket, containing rice and potatoes
for his own consumption.
These islands have no intercourse
with any part of the world except Loo Choo, to which
they pay tribute as dependencies, and from whence they
annually receive the necessaries they may require,
by a junk. They had no idea that the continents
of Europe or America existed. They had only heard
of China, Loo Choo, and Japan, and they could hardly
credit our assertions when we stated that we had lately
gained a great victory over China. When we gave
them a description of steam vessels, and first-rate
men-of-war carrying 120 guns, they evidently disbelieved
us. We were the first white men they had ever
seen; and ludicrous was the repeated examination of
our arms, which they bared and contrasted with their
own. After great persuasion a few of the chief
mandarins and their suites visited the ship, which
was put in holiday attire upon the occasion. It
would be impossible to attempt to describe their rapture
at the neatness, order, and regularity which reigned
on board. The guns were shotted and fired for
their amusement: they threw up their hands in
astonishment, and gazed on us and on each other with
looks of blank amazement. During the whole of
our peregrinations over these islands we never saw
a female, for on our approach to any village a courier
was sent ahead to warn the inhabitants of our arrival,
when the women either shut themselves up or retired
to an adjacent village until we had passed through.
The men assisted us in our labours and attended to
our comforts by all the means in their power.
Horses were provided every day, houses for us at night,
and good substantial repasts. Wherever they enter,
the natives invariably eat and drink, more, I believe,
from custom than from hunger. On these occasions
tea is the general beverage, the kettle being a large
shell, which admirably answers the purpose. It
may be worthy of remark, that on entering a house,
the shoes or sandals are invariably left at the door.
Two of the chiefs were deservedly great favourites
with our party; they were given the famous names of
Chesterfield and Beaufort, the former from his gentlemanly
manners, the latter from the profound knowledge he
displayed of all rocks, shoals, &c. On the 17th
of December, having completed our survey of Pa-tchu-san,
we returned to the ship: on the 22d we left our
anchorage, which was christened Port Providence, and
ran round to Kuchee Bay on the opposite side of the
island. This noble bay was called Port Haddington,
in honour of the late first lord of the Admiralty.
On the 27th the first barge, cutter, and gig left
the ship to survey the island Ku-king-san, the
nearest port of which was about twenty miles from
Kuchee Bay, alias Port Haddington, where we lay at
anchor. The boats carried with them provisions
for three weeks, by which time it was supposed that
the survey would be completed. As the formation
of this island is similar to Pa-tchu-san, it would
be but repetition to describe it minutely, but it
is worthy of remark that it is indented with numerous
deep bays, in each of which there is sufficient water
for a ship of the line. Many of these bays have
natural breakwaters, created by shoals, with a deep
water passage on either side of them, and which may
be easily distinguished from the shoals by the deep
blue colour of the water.
On the 15th of January, 1844, the
surveying party returned, having been absent twenty
days. We were again visited by the mandarins,
who came to bid us farewell: they quitted us
with many expressions of good will, and expressed
a wish that we would return again, and as individuals,
I had no doubt of their sincerity.
On the 18th of January we sailed for
Ty-ping-san, which is situated about seventy
miles north of Pa-tchu-san. On the following
day we sighted the land, and late in the evening anchored
off the coast. This island is low, compared with
the other islands of the group. The following
morning the captain landed and presented a letter of
introduction given him by the mandarins of Pa-tchu-san.
The letter of introduction had the best effects, for
we were immediately visited by the principal mandarins,
who informed us that we should be furnished with horses
and every thing else that we might require.
It was on a reef to the northward
of this island that the Providence, of twenty guns,
was wrecked about fifty years back. Captain Broughton
and the crew arrived safely at Ty-ping-san, but
the present inhabitants, when it was mentioned, either
did not or would not recollect any thing of the circumstances.
As a proof of the morality of these people, and how
much crime is held in abhorrence, I have the following
little history to narrate.
During our survey, we fixed a station upon the extremity of a bleak and
desolate point of land running more than a mile into the sea. There, in a
cave formed by a reef on a mass of rock, we discovered two skeletons. This
would not have so much excited our suspicion, had it not been from the
remarkable locality, as in all the graves we fell in with the corpses were
invariably uncoffined. We expressed a wish to know why such a spot should
have been fixed upon as a last resting-place, as it was many miles from the
nearest habitation. It was not until after much entreaty that they at
length, very reluctantly, consented to give us the desired explanation, which,
as nearly as I can recollect, was as follows:
A young girl, who was considered as
the belle and pride of the nearest town, had formed
an attachment to a youth who had been brought up with
her, as a playmate, from their earliest years; and
it was acknowledged by the inhabitants of the town
that a more fitting match could not be made, as the
young man was of most graceful mien, and equally well
favoured as his mistress; but the father of the girl,
who had been all along blind to the natural consequences
of their long intimacy, had other views for his daughter,
and had selected a husband for her whose chief recommendation
was his wealth. So far it is the old story.
To oppose her father’s commands
was not to be thought of, for filial obedience is,
with this people, one of the most sacred of duties.
The bridal day approached; presents had been exchanged
between the parents of the parties; and every thing
was in a forward state for the celebration of the
nuptials, with all the magnificence befitting the
wealthy condition of the bridegroom. The lovers
were in a state of phrensy, but solaced themselves
with stolen interviews. At length the poor girl,
urged by her lover, confessed every thing to her father,
and implored his mercy. He was thunderstruck
at this intelligence, for till that moment he had
imagined that his daughter had not a thought to which
he was not privy. The most rigorous discipline
was resorted to the girl was confined to
her chamber, and spies placed to watch every motion.
Those to whom she thought she could trust were suborned
by her father, and to him were conveyed all the letters
which she believed to have been safely conveyed to
her lover. His notes being also intercepted, at
last each considered the other as faithless.
The poor girl, imagining that her lover had forsaken
her, at last sent to her father, to acquaint him that
she had returned to her duty, and was ready to receive
the man whom he had selected for her husband.
They were married: but she deceived herself;
as soon as the ceremony was over, the courage which
had supported her gave way, her former feelings returned
stronger than ever, and she hated herself for her
fickleness. Her heart whispered that it was impossible
that one possessing every great and every amiable
quality, as did her lover, could ever have proved faithless,
or would have abandoned one who loved him so dearly.
As she sat in the garden and wept, a slight noise
attracted her attention, and she found in her presence
her lover, disguised, who had come to take a last farewell.
Explanations immediately ensued they found
that they had been tricked their love and
their despair overcame their reason, and they fled.
The father and bridegroom pursued the guilty pair,
and after a most rigorous search, they were discovered.
They knew that their fate was sealed, and they bore
up bravely to the last. They were arraigned,
found guilty, and condemned to death; after which their
bodies were to be removed far from any dwelling-place.
The sentence was carried into effect, and their remains
were deposited in the cave in which we discovered
them. Many parents might draw a lesson from this
tragedy, and anybody who feels inclined may write
a novel upon it; it must not, however, bear the same
title as the Chinese one translated by Governor Davis,
which is styled the “Fortunate Union.”
In ten days we completed the survey
of the island, and sailed for Batan, where we
arrived on the 7th of February. There we remained
a few days, and then sailed for Hong Kong, having
but three days’ provisions on board. We
encountered a heavy gale; but, fortunately, it was
in our favour. On the 9th a junk was reported
in sight; and in the course of an hour we were sufficiently
near to perceive that the people on board of her were
making signals of distress, and cutting away her masts.
We hove to as near to her as we could venture, for
the sea ran high, and lowered a boat, which reached
the junk in safety. They found her to be in a
sinking state: a hawser was made fast to her,
with the intention of towing her into Hong Kong, then
not fifty miles distant. We again made sail,
towing the junk at a rapid rate; but the strain caused
her planks to sever, and consequently increased the
rush of water in her hold. The Chinese hailed
the ship, and entreated to be rescued from their perilous
condition. She was immediately hauled alongside,
and twelve of her crew succeeded in getting on board
of us; but the hawser gave way, and the junk drifted
astern, with five men still remaining on board.
Sail was immediately made, and in a short time we
ran alongside of her, staving in her bulwarks, for
both vessels were rolling heavily. Fortunately
her mainmast had gone by the board; had it been still
standing, and had become locked in our rigging, we
should have been in great peril ourselves. The
remaining five men and a dog gained the ship, and the
junk again went astern, and in three minutes afterwards
went to the bottom. When they saw her sink, the
Chinese raised up a cry at their miraculous escape.
One poor fellow had his hand shockingly mutilated,
it having been crushed between the sides of the two
vessels.
The wind had now much subsided, and
we made sail for Hong Kong, where we arrived on the
following day. There we found the Agincourt, Sir
Thomas Cochrane, who was now commander-in-chief, Sir
William Parker having sailed for England. The
cutter and two of the Company’s steamers were
also here; and the Minden hospital ship, as usual,
crowded with the sick and dying. Our first lieutenant,
Mr. Wade, took this opportunity of leaving the ship,
and Mr. Heard succeeded him.
On the 6th we sailed for Macao, which
is too well known to require any description here.
On the 10th we sailed for Manilla, an account of which
I shall reserve for our future visit. On the 1st
of April we again sailed, on a surveying cruise, to
the southward. After fixing the positions of
several small islands in the Mendoro Sea, we steered
for Samboangan, a Spanish penal colony, situated at
the southern extremity of Mindanao. On the 8th
we arrived there, and took up our anchorage close
to the town.
Samboangan is built on an extensive
plain; most of the houses are supported on poles ten
or twelve feet from the ground. The roofs are
thatched, and the sides covered with palm leaves, ingeniously
secured by strips of bamboo. The fort is well
built; and although a century old, is in very good
preservation. It has a numerous garrison, and
is defended by guns of large calibre. There is
also an establishment of gun-boats, which scour the
coast in search of pirates. On each side, and
at the back of the town, are groves of cocoa-nuts,
bamboos, plantains, and other fruit trees, through
which narrow paths are cut, forming delightful shady
walks to a stranger, who gazes with astonishment and
pleasure upon the variety of delicious fruits, of whose
existence he had no idea. The plain on which
the town is built extends about eight miles inland,
when it is bounded by a chain of mountains, which divides
the Spanish territory from that of the warlike tribes
who inhabit the interior.
The plain I have spoken of is covered
with small villages, pleasantly situated among thick
groves of trees; and it is watered by numerous streams.
The whole country around Samboangan abounds in scenery
of the most picturesque description; and the groups
of gaily-dressed and joyous natives in no small degree
add to the beauty of the landscape. Horses can
be obtained at very moderate charges; but unfortunately
no one has ever thought of establishing an hotel,
and the want of one was much felt. We were, therefore,
thrown upon the hospitality and kindness of the natives,
who made us welcome by every demonstration in their
power. Fruit, chocolate, and sweet biscuits, were
the ordinary refreshments, for which the charges made
scarcely repaid the trouble of preparing them.
The church, priests’ and governor’s
houses, are the only respectable buildings in the
colony; the other houses in the town are very inferior,
being inhabited by liberated exiles from Manilla.
We remained here five days, and early on the morning
of the 13th ran down to a watering-place about fifteen
miles from the town, and completed our water.
The same night we sailed for Sooloo;
and the next day, when performing divine service,
it being Sunday, the officer of the watch reported
five prahus in sight, full of men, and each armed
with a long gun, pulling towards the ship. It
was quite calm at the time, and our main deck ports
were open. No doubt they perceived the daylight
through the ports, and satisfied themselves that we
were a man-of-war, for they soon afterwards altered
their course, and made for the shore. We presumed
that they were pirates from the island of Baselan,
who, fancying we were a merchant vessel, had come
out with the intention of attacking us.
At noon on the 16th of April we made
the town of Sooloo, the capital of the island of the
same name. It being calm, and the ship at some
distance from the anchorage, the gig was sent ahead
to board one of the three schooners lying in
the bay, and hoist a light, as a guide to the ship;
and a rocket was put into the boat to fire in case
of being attacked by superior numbers. There
were but five men in the gig!
After two hours’ hard pulling,
they arrived alongside the largest of the three vessels.
She proved to be the Velocipede, an English vessel,
trading to Sooloo for pearl oysters. The owner
of the schooner soon came from the shore, having been
sent off by the sultan of Sooloo to know the object
of our visit. He was accompanied by several Datus
or chiefs, who went back to the town perfectly satisfied
with the explanation given. But the arrival of
a man-of-war appeared to excite the fears of the natives,
for gongs were sounding throughout the night, and lights
were flitting to and fro, by the aid of which it was
perceived that there was a strong assemblage of the
natives.
The ship anchored on the afternoon
of the following day, and the captain, attended by
several of his officers, visited the sultan. We
were received by the prime minister, who informed us
that the sultan was somewhat indisposed, and begged
to postpone the interview until the following day.
Leaving the palace, we strolled through the town, which
is partly built in the water; bridges, formed of interlaced
bamboo, were the means of communication between the
houses. As these bridges were some hundred yards
in length, the walking was somewhat dangerous; a slip
would have been the cause of a good ducking and a swim
to any unlucky wight, which, I have no doubt, would
have given great satisfaction to the townspeople,
who, armed with spears, krisses, and shields, were
watching our motions; but no such mishap occurred,
and we returned on board before sunset. Next
day the captain and the same party went again on shore,
and were received by the sultan in person. He
was dressed in the extreme of Malay fashion.
He was an excessively plain young man, and seemed
to be ill at ease during the whole of the conference.
He appeared to be a mere puppet in the hands of his
ferocious chiefs, who had all the conversation, without
referring to their royal master at any time.
The sultan’s dress consisted
of a purple satin jacket and green velvet trousers,
both trimmed with gold and silver lace; a red sash
confined his trousers at the waist; and in the sash
he wore a kris of the most costly description.
He wore diamond buttons on his jacket, which, being
open, exposed his naked chest. But the party who
mostly excited our interest was the heir apparent,
a child of four years old, who was dressed as an adult,
even to his miniature kris. He bids fair to be
a handsome man. His laughing face and engaging
manner caused him to be caressed by the whole party,
a circumstance which evidently gave much pleasure
to the sultan. We were regaled with chocolate,
sweet cakes, and fruit; and every attention paid to
us by the chiefs. At our departure the sultan
and ministers shook hands warmly with every one of
our party, and we returned on board, accompanied by
Mr. Wyndham, of the Velocipede schooner, who, being
a perfect master of the tongue, had acted as an interpreter
on this occasion.
The Samarang was the first English
man-of-war that had called at Sooloo since the visit
of Dalrymple in 1761, when he reinstated on the throne
the sultan (grandfather to the present one), who had
been deposed by his rebellious subjects.
Great Sooloo is about fifty miles
in length, and twenty-five in breadth, being the largest
of a group of islands known as the Sooloo Archipelago.
This group of islands is inhabited by a fierce and
warlike race, bearing in their personal appearance
a strong resemblance to the Malays, although the two
languages differ materially from each other. Great
Sooloo, the residence of the sultan, is very mountainous.
Many of the mountains are wooded to the summit, while
others are covered with patches of cultivation.
These islands are thickly populated; and if the islanders
do not practise piracy as a profession, they are always
ready to aid, assist, and protect those who do.
The town of Sooloo is well known to be the principal
rendezvous of pirates, who, whenever they have made
a capture, resort there to dispose of their lawless
booty. The ministers, and even the sultan himself,
are not able to resist the temptation of being able
to purchase European goods, and articles of value,
for less than half their real value. If not the
stealers, they are the receivers, and thus they patronise
piracy of every description. Governed by their
own prince, and independent of any other power, the
people of Sooloo have most extravagant notions of their
own prowess, and of the strength of their fortifications;
and they ridicule the idea of any one venturing to
interfere with or attack them.
On the 18th of April we sailed from
Sooloo, and visited several islands in the Archipelago,
on one of which we grounded, but escaped without sustaining
any damage. On the 23rd we anchored off Unsang,
the eastern province of Borneo, where we remained
four days surveying the coast. A shooting and
fishing party visited the shore daily: the former
killed several wild hogs, and the latter brought every
evening a plentiful supply of fish.
On the 27th of April sailed from Unsang.
This day we first served out our ship-brewed porter,
in addition to the usual allowance of spirits.
It continued to be served out nightly, but opinions
were very different about its merits.
For several days after leaving Unsang,
we had but little or no wind, and we were borne away
by a strong easterly current, till we were carried
in sight of Celebes, which is high and mountainous,
and covered with dense forests of gigantic trees.
On Sunday, the 4th of May, we arrived off Cape Rivers
(Celebes), the position of which was determined by
astronomical observations. It was the intention
of the captain to have passed through the Straits
of Macassar, but light wind, and a strong current
from the southward, would not permit us to gain a mile
per day. After experiencing very disagreeable
weather while off the coast, we bore up and made sail
for Monado, a Dutch settlement on one of the north-western
promontories of this remarkably shaped island.
Our passage was any thing but agreeable; scarcely
a night passed that we were not visited by strong
squalls, accompanied by thunder, lightning, and heavy
rain. On Sunday, the 18th, we anchored in forty-eight
fathoms off the town of Monado, within two cables’
length of the shore, which shelves very suddenly into
deep water. A kedge was laid out in-shore of the
ship, and kept well taut; a requisite precaution, as
otherwise, if the land breeze blew off strong, the
ship would have dragged her anchor down the steep
beach, and drifted out.
The town of Monado is built on a plain
surrounded by mountains, the highest of which, Klabat,
is 6000 feet above the level of the sea. The
houses are well built, and neatly thatched; they are
all detached, and enclosed in a yard or garden.
The roads are excellent, and reflect great credit
upon a Prussian engineer, who undertook the task.
The fort, which is at the water’s edge, is small,
but strongly built, and well adapted to resist the
attack of any native force, although I should imagine
it could not hold out any time against the well-directed
fire of a frigate’s broadside. A party
of us enjoyed a pleasant ramble through the town and
suburbs, which are dotted with neat cottages, where
their owners invited us to enter and partake of refreshments.
We went into several, and found them scrupulously
neat and clean, as Dutch houses usually are.
The people who entertained us refused all compensation,
and it was with difficulty that we prevailed upon
the black-eyed damsels to accept our silk handkerchiefs
by way of reminiscences. Very few Europeans reside
here, although their half-bred offspring may be seen
in every tenth person, and they boast of the European
blood which flows in their veins. Monado abounds
with poultry, fruit, vegetables, and all the necessaries
of life. Cocoa and sugar are cultivated.
Stock is easily obtained, and very moderate; and water
is procured from a small river which divides the town.
Boats should enter the river at last quarter flood,
and return first quarter ebb, as the tide falls rapidly;
and at low water the bar at the entrance is dry.
During our stay we surveyed the major portion of the
bay, finding nothing under 150 fathoms of water at
one-third of a mile from the shore.
We found here a Mr. Hart, who had
been left at this place in consequence of his precarious
state, from a gun-shot wound he had received on the
Coti River (Borneo). Mr. Hart was a volunteer
in the ill-fated expedition undertaken by Mr. Murray,
who attempted to establish a colony in the Coti River,
and who lost his life in an encounter with the natives.
The vessels employed a brig and a schooner were
fitting out at Hong Kong while we were there.
We fell in with the schooner (the Young Queen) the
day after we left Manilla. The captain of her
came on board to give us the intelligence of the failure
of the expedition, with the death of its leader.
Misfortune appeared to cling to them, for, soon after
the schooner left Coti, the crew of her mutinied, and
the mutiny was not put down but by the death of the
ringleader, who was shot by the commander. He
was bound to Hong Kong to deliver himself up for trial
for taking the life of the man, and I hardly need
observe that he was fully acquitted. This gentleman
was a brother of Mr. Hart.
On the 26th of May, our observations
being completed, we sailed from Monado; Mr. Hart,
with the captain’s permission, taking advantage
of this opportunity of reaching Sincapore. The
following day we ran through the Straits of Banca,
and steered for Ternate, off which island we arrived
on the following Saturday. On Sunday morning,
before daylight, we struck heavily on a coral reef,
but by dint of great exertion we got off, and floated
at six. A boat was despatched to the Dutch governor
of the town to state that it was not our intention
to anchor. The island of Ternate is, I believe,
governed by a sultan, who has sway over several other
islands. The Dutch have a settlement here, and
have long been on good terms with the ruling powers.
It is the most important of the Molucca group, as
it produces a vast quantity of cloves, beside every
variety of tropical fruits. It was taken by us
in 1810, and restored in 1815. This island, as
far as I could judge, is perfectly round, and about
twenty-five miles in circuit, the land gradually rising
to a huge peak in the centre. It is of volcanic
formation. It is well wooded, and abounds with
game; and on this island the boa constrictor grows
to the largest size, being often found upwards of
thirty feet in length. The Dutch town is built
on the south-east side of the island. The houses
appear to be better constructed than those of Monado,
and the whole town better arranged. There are
several forts, two churches, and apparently about
400 houses. The one occupied by the governor is
distinguished from the others by its size, and superiority
of architecture and decorations. We obtained
quantities of every description of fruit from the boats
which crowded round the ship: in addition to shaddocks,
pineapples, oranges, bananas, and many other common
varieties, we had the delightful treat of the mangosteins,
which grow only in these latitudes. It is impossible
to describe the peculiarly grateful taste of this cool
and refreshing fruit. It is a mixture of the
sweet and acid, blended in the most luscious manner.
It is in size somewhat smaller than an apple, and
the skin, which is very thick and bitter, of a dark
plum colour. This when dried is used as a remedy
for the dysentery. The inside, which is nearly
white, is divided into four parts, resembling in substance
a firm jelly; and, in my opinion, gives one more the
idea of what nectar was, or ought to be, than any
thing else which enters into the mouth of man.
We decided that the Peak of Ternate was the true Mount
Olympus, and that it was there that the gods were
assembled and, in ancient days, ate mangosteins, called
nectar by the Greeks.
The boat which had been sent on shore
to the governor at length returned, and we made sail
to the southward, to survey a portion of the coast
of Gilolo (another of the Spice Islands), which was
supposed to be laid down incorrectly in the charts.
On the morning of Monday, the 3rd
of June, the ship being off the coast of Gilolo, the
gig with the captain, and the barge with several officers,
left the ship with four days’ provisions to survey
a portion of the coast. At 11 A. M. they landed
on a reef, running out about a cable’s length
from a small island. About two in the afternoon
a body of natives, armed with spears and krisses,
issued with loud yells from the jungle, and advanced
towards them. At the same time a prahu pulled
round a point, and made towards the barge, which was
at anchor about fifty yards from the shore. The
captain was at the time on shore taking observations,
but as the natives approached he retired to the gig
and got the arms in readiness. The natives came
within 100 yards of us, and then halted. The
captain signed them to go away: they approached
nearer; we gave them a volley, and they hastily retreated
into the jungle.
The barge was now prepared for the
expected attack of the prahu, which by this time had
approached within point blank range of the barge’s
gun, which was a brass six-pounder. Observing,
it is to be presumed, that the boat was so well-armed,
and the men were loading the gun, the prahu ceased
pulling, and hoisted Dutch colours. They were
ordered to pull for the Gilolo shore, which they did;
a rocket fired at them quickening their speed considerably.
At 3 P. M. the observations being completed, the astronomical
instruments were re-embarked on the barge, and the
captain quitted the gig and went into the barge.
Both boats were pulled towards the main land.
On the in-shore side of the small island I have mentioned,
we discovered a village consisting of fifteen or twenty
houses. The gig was despatched with two officers
to burn the village, which was done; the natives who
were in the huts escaping into the jungle. In
the mean time, the barge proceeded towards a large
village in search of the prahu. On their way
they fell in with a large canoe, at anchor in one
of the creeks.
Taking the canoe in tow, we again
took to the oars, and in a short time perceived the
natives hauling the prahu into a creek. A round
of grape quickly decided the matter; the natives fled,
and the prahu was quietly taken possession of by our
crew. Having effected our object, we proceeded
along the coast with our two prizes in tow. At
sunset, after rifling the boats of arms, flags, and
gongs, we set them on fire, and made sail to the southward;
the gig, which had rejoined us, being in company.
About midnight we anchored in a small and lonely bay, I
should say, twenty miles from where the above occurrences
took place. We took our meals, but did not attempt
to repose till after two in the morning, although
we were quite tired after the events of the day before.
We then lay down, and composed ourselves to sleep.
We had not, however, been recumbent
long, ere the sounds of gongs were heard at a distance;
and shortly afterwards the man on the look-out reported
that three prahus were coming into the bay. A
short time sufficed to have every thing in readiness
for the expected conflict.
The foremost of the prahus approached
within ten yards of the barge, lowered her sail, and
rounded to. A native, one of the chiefs we presumed,
inquired in broken English if we belonged to a ship.
The captain would not satisfy him on that point, but
desired him to go away.
The other two prahus, having been
joined by a third (making four in all), had now closed
within half pistol shot, and lowered their sails.
Seeing that we were completely enclosed,
a musket-ball was fired over the largest prahu.
The men in the prahus gave their accustomed yell, and
the whole force advanced towards us.
The six-pounder, loaded with round
and grape, was now fired into the largest prahu; the
cries and confusion were great; the crew of the prahu
leapt into the water, but few arrived on shore, they
sunk under the fire of our muskets. The three
other prahus then commenced a spirited fire from their
guns and small arms, assisted by a flight of arrows
and spears.
Pulling within twenty yards of them,
we plied them alternately with grape and canister
from our six-pounder. The engagement continued
with great vigour for some time, when their fire slackened;
and shortly afterwards two more of the prahus were
deserted by their crews, who made for the shore; the
fourth made off. The three prahus were taken
possession of, towed into deep water, and anchored.
Leaving the gig in charge of them, we went in pursuit
of the fourth prahu, and soon came up with her; but
her crew escaped by running the boat on shore.
Another prahu now hove in sight, pulling,
or rather paddling, towards us. Leaving our prize,
we faced our new antagonist, saluting her with grape
and musquetry, and causing so much havoc, that, shrieking
and yelling, they made for the nearest shore without
returning a single shot. We followed her, firing
into her as fast as possible. On coming up with
her we found her aground, with six dead and one mortally
wounded; the remainder of the crew had saved themselves
by wading to the shore. After getting this prahu
afloat, we brought the other prahu, which we had just
before captured (N.), alongside. This boat
was crowded with dead and dying. Among the latter
was a female child, apparently about eight months
old, in a state of nudity. The poor little creature’s
left arm was nearly severed from its body by a grape
shot. She was removed into the boat, where the
rest of the wounded were placed, with as much care
as possible. A low moaning sound escaped from
her lips, her eyes were glazed, and she evidently
was fast dying: it would have been a mercy to
have put an end to her sufferings. The dead were
then thrown overboard, and the prahu set on fire;
the last prahu, containing the wounded, was left to
her fate.
It was now daylight, and on looking
around we perceived five more prahus off a point between
the gig and ourselves in the barge and several others
pulling in from seaward. We gave way for the five
prahus, which were drawn up in a line ready to receive
us. Notwithstanding their fire, assisted by their
spears and other missiles, we pulled within fifteen
yards of the outermost prahu of the five, and discharged
our gun, accompanied by a volley of musquetry.
The other prahus now closed and poured in a heavy
fire; but, although the barge was struck, not one of
our men was injured. The repeated fire from the
boats soon caused the people in the prahus to make
for the shore through the water, when many of them
fell from our musquetry. It was now about six
o’clock in the morning, our last charge of canister
shot was in the gun, the last rocket in the tube,
and nearly all the percussion caps expended. The
barge was pulled closer to the nearest prahu to give
more effect to the discharge, and the captain was
in the stern of the barge with the rocket tube in
hand, when one of the prahus on shore fired her swivel;
the ball struck the captain, and knocked him overboard.
He was hauled in, and we found that he had received
a severe wound in the groin, which was dressed by
the surgeon.
Lieutenant Baugh now took the
command, and the gun was discharged with good effect,
and all the people on board of the prahus, who were
able to escape, made for the shore. One of our
marines was wounded in the neck with an arrow, and,
with the exception of the captain, no other casualty
took place.
The fight would have been continued
with the round shot still left in the barge, but the
assistant surgeon was anxious that the captain should
return to the ship and have the ball extracted.
The barge therefore pulled for the ship, whose royals
were just visible above the horizon. The pirates,
finding that we were retreating, returned to their
prahus and fired their guns at us, but without effect.
We arrived on board about 9 A. M.,
and the ship’s head was put towards the scene
of action, while the barge and two cutters were despatched
in search of the gig, of whose safety we had great
doubts. About 11.30, A.M., the second cutter,
being in advance, discovered a sail in shore, and
which, by the aid of our telescopes, we made out to
be the gig. When we closed with her, and found
that all was right we were greatly relieved.
We heard from Mr. Hooper, the purser, who was in her,
that after waiting in vain for the barge’s return,
he set fire to the prahus. In one of them he
found a woman and child alive, whom he landed at the
nearest point. He then pulled in the direction
we had gone, being guided by the sound of our guns.
On his arrival in the bay we were not in sight, and
perceiving several prahus with flags flying and gongs
beating, he naturally concluded that we had been overpowered,
and he was making the best of his way towards the
ship. The boats continued pulling towards the
shore, leaving the gig to return to the ship and ease
the minds of the ship’s company respecting her
safety.
On our arrival in the bay with the
barge and cutters, we found that the prahus had hauled
into a creek, on the banks of which was a masked battery,
which opened a spirited fire upon us as soon as we
came within range. After an hour’s cannonading
on both sides we were joined by the gig, with orders
for us not to land, but to return to the ship at sunset.
This order was not received with pleasure, as we hoped
to have a chance of punishing the fellows a little
more. We pulled a short distance along the coast,
and entered another bay, in which we destroyed two
prahus; after which we returned to the ship. Calms,
and a strong current setting to the northward, detained
the ship near the scene of action for several days.
We at length passed through the straits of Patientia,
but did not get the breeze until we sighted the Isle
of Bouro. Passing through the Bontà passage,
straits of Salayer, and Java sea, we arrived at Sincapore
on the 28th of June.
Here we found the Harlequin, which
had had a brush with the pirates on the coast of Sumatra.
The Harlequin, Wanderer, and Diana were sent to the
villages of Micedo and Batta, to demand the murderers
of an English captain. On the rajah refusing
to deliver them up, the vessels opened their fire
and burnt the villages. The Harlequin lost two
men killed and five wounded; among the latter was
Lieutenant Chads, whose arm was nearly severed by
a Malay kris. While here the Superb arrived from
Hong Kong on her way to England; the Driver, with
Sir Henry Pottinger on board; and the Cambrian, Commodore
Chads. Also the Iris from England, and the Dido
from Hong Kong, which latter vessel sailed for Sarawak.
I may as well here remark, that the
Dutch made a formal complaint against our captain
for having attacked their prahus, which they asserted
were not pirates, but employed by them against the
pirates. It is but fair to give the arguments
that were used against us, particularly as the authorities
at Sincapore appeared to think that we were to blame.
They said, you were in boats, and you touched at Gillolo;
the natives, accustomed to be taken off by the Illanoan
pirates, were naturally jealous and suspicious, seeing
no vessel. They came alone, armed, to ascertain
who you were. At 100 yards they stopped; you
signalled them to go away, and they advanced nearer
to you, but they committed no act of hostility.
You fired a volley at them, and they retreated.
Here the aggression was on your side.
At the same time, you say, a war prahu
pulled round the point, and approached to within range;
when the prahu was close to you she ceased paddling,
and hoisted Dutch colours. You desired it to pull
for the Gillolo shore, which it did. There was
no aggression in this instance, and nothing piratical
in the conduct of the prahu. After she had obeyed
your order to pull to the Gillolo shore, you wantonly
fired a Congreve rocket at her; your conduct in this
instance being much more like that of a pirate than
hers. In the afternoon you pull along the Gillolo
shore, and you discover a village; you send your boat
ashore and set fire to it. Why so? You state
that you were attacked by Illanoan pirates, who reside
at Tampassook, some hundred miles from Gillolo, and
you then burn the village of the people of Gillolo,
and that without the least aggression on their part.
Is it surprising that you should be supposed to be
pirates after such wanton outrage? To proceed:
you state that you then go in search of the prahu
which you ordered away, and that on your way you captured
a large canoe, which you take in tow, and afterwards
perceive the pirates hauling their vessel into a creek.
You attack them, and they run away, leaving the prahu
in your possession, and, as usual, after rifling the
prahu and canoe, you set them on fire. Up to
this point there has been nothing but aggression on
your part; and it is not, therefore, surprising that
you were supposed to be pirates, and that the communication
was made along the coast, and the vessels employed
against the pirates were summoned for its protection.
Again, the prahus came out and surrounded you; they
did not fire at you, but hailed you in English, requesting
to know if you belonged to a ship. Now, if any
thing could prove that they were not pirate vessels,
it was their doing this; and had you replied, they
would have explained to you what their employment
was: but you think proper to give no answer to
this simple question, order them to go away, and then
fire a loaded musket into them, which brings on the
conflict which you so much desired. That these
observations were true, it must be admitted, and the
complaint of the Dutch, with the hoisting of the Dutch
flag, gave great weight to them: however, pirates
or no pirates, the Admiralty Court, on our arrival
in England, considered them to have been such; and,
as will be seen by the extract from the “Times”
below, awarded head money to the amount of about 10,000l.
to the captain and crew of the Samarang, and for his wound received, our captain
obtained a pension of (I believe) L250 a year.
“Admiralty court.
(Before Dr. Lushington.)
“Illanoan pirates. Bounty.
“In this case a petition was presented
by Sir Edward Belcher, the captain, and the rest
of the officers and crew of Her Majesty’s
ship-of-war Samarang, setting forth that on the 3d
of June, 1844, the Samarang being then engaged
in surveying duties, and near the island of Gillolo,
on her passage towards the Straits of Patientia,
Sir E. Belcher, with two officers and four men,
quitted her in the gig, accompanied by the second barge,
armed with a brass six-pounder gun and small arms,
and manned with twenty officers and men.
While engaged on the extreme side of a reef, extending
from a small islet, in taking astronomical observations,
they were disturbed by an extraordinary yell proceeding
from about forty men of colour, who were advancing
from the islet along both sides of the reef, with
the evident intention of surrounding Sir E. Belcher
and his party, on nearing whom they commenced
hurling spears and arrows, though without effect.
They were soon repulsed and put to flight by musketry.
In the course of the day several large prahus made
their appearance, manned by large crews of Malay
pirates, and severe conflicts took place between
the respective parties, in one of which a ball
from the leading prahu struck Sir E. Belcher on
the thigh, and knocked him overboard, severely and
dangerously wounding him; but, having been lifted
out of the water, and dragged into the barge,
he shortly after resumed the command, and
ultimately succeeded in destroying all the prahus.
“Dr. Addams applied to the Court
to award the bounties specified in the 6th of
George IV. c 49. for the capture and destruction
of piratical ships and vessels. He submitted
that the affidavits produced clearly showed the
character of the persons on board the prahus,
and that not less than 1,330 persons were alive on
board the several prahus at the beginning of the
attack, 350 of whom were killed.
“The Queen’s Advocate,
on behalf of the Crown, admitted that a
very meritorious service had
been performed, and made no
opposition to the application.
“The Court pronounced
for the usual bounties on the number of
pirates stated.”
Our captain having now nearly recovered
from the wound which he had received, we found that
our destination was Borneo; but previous to the ship
getting under weigh, the boats were ordered to be manned
and armed, to proceed on an excursion to Romania Point,
distant about thirty miles from Sincapore. It
was expected that we might there fall in with some
of the piratical vessels which so completely infest
the Indian Archipelago; and if so, we trusted to give
them a lesson which might for a time put a check to
their nefarious and cruel system of plunder and rapine.
I found that my name was down in the list of the party
selected for the expedition. Bidding, therefore,
a temporary adieu to Sincapore, on the 2d of August
we set off on the expedition, with a force consisting
of two barges, one cutter, and a gun-boat belonging
to the merchants of Sincapore, which had been expressly
built to resist any attacks of these bold assailants.
Although the real object of the expedition
was, as I have above stated, to fall in with the pirates,
our ostensible one was to survey the islands off the
Point Romania, which is the most unfrequented part
of the Malay peninsula. We arrived there late
at night, as ignorant whether the pirates were there,
as the pirates would have been of our arrival.
We had, therefore, nothing to do but to anchor close
under the land, and keep a sharp look-out, in case
of being the attacked instead of the attacking party.
As we were not indifferently provided with the creature
comforts which Sincapore afforded, we amused ourselves
pretty well; but if we occasionally opened our mouths,
we took good care not to shut our eyes, and were constantly
on the alert. There is a far from pleasant feeling
attached to lying in an open boat, in a night as dark
as pitch, expecting a momentary attack from an insidious
enemy, and wholly in a state of uncertainty as to
from what quarter it may be made, or as to what odds
you may be exposed. Under these circumstances,
we remained in watching and silence during a night
which appeared interminably long; and daylight was
gladly welcomed by the whole party; and when it arrived
we found ourselves anchored among a crowd of small
islands, which were covered from the beach to their
summits with the most luxuriant foliage. Within
shore of us was a beautiful little sandy bay; while
the whole coast, as far as the eye could reach, was
one extended jungle, by all accounts extending many
hundred miles inland, and infested with tigers and
other beasts of prey. As for pirates, we saw nothing
of them, or any signs of their having been in that
quarter; either they were away on some distant marauding
party, or, having received intelligence of our approach
and force, had considered us too strong to be opposed,
and had kept out of the way. Our warlike expedition,
therefore, was soon changed into a sort of pic-nic
party we amused ourselves with bathing,
turning of turtle, shooting, and eating the wild pine-apples
which grew on all the islands. We remained there
for three days, during which nothing occurred worth
narrating, unless it is an instance of the thoughtless
and reckless conduct of midshipmen. We were pulling
leisurely along the coast in one of the boats, when
we perceived a very large Bengal tiger taking an evening
stroll, and who, by the motion of his tail, was evidently
in a state of much self-satisfaction. We winded
the boat’s head towards him, and were preparing
to give him a round of grape from the gun, but before
we could get the gun well pointed, he retreated majestically
into the jungle, which was in the bight of a small
bay, and cut off from the main jungle by some large
rocks. Three of our party immediately declared
that they would have a tiger-hunt, and bring back
his skin as a trophy. They landed, two of them
having each a ship’s musket, a very uncertain
weapon, as they are at present provided, for, whether
from damp or careless manufacture, the percussion caps
will not often go off; and the third armed with nothing
but a knife. On their landing, they took their
position on the rocks, and were delighted to find
that the tiger could not retreat to the main jungle
without passing them. They had not long taken
up their position before they heard the crackling
of the wood in the jungle, announcing the tiger’s
approach towards them. They fixed their bayonets
and cocked their locks; the young gentleman with the
knife was also prepared; but the noise in the jungle
ceased. Whether it was that the tiger was afraid
to attack three at the same time, or was making a
circuit for a more convenient spring upon them, certain
it is that our three young gentlemen either became
tired of waiting for him, or had thought better of
their mad attempt. One proposed returning to
the boat, the others assented; and after denouncing
the tiger as a coward, and wholly unworthy of the name
of a royal tiger, they commenced their retreat as
the dark set in; gradually their pace quickened, in
two minutes they were in a hard trot; at last the
panic took them all, and by the time they arrived at
the boats they could not speak from want of breath,
so hurried had been their retreat. We sincerely
congratulated them upon their arrival safe and sound,
and having escaped without loss of life and limb from
a very mad adventure. I subsequently related
this incident to an old Indian sportsman, who told
me that my messmates had had a most fortunate escape,
as they would have had little or no chance had the
tiger made his spring, which he certainly would have
done had they remained much longer, and that one of
them at least must have been sacrificed. On the
morning of the fourth day, the ship, having made sail
from Sincapore, hove in sight, and picked us up.
The boats were hoisted in, and we steered for Borneo,
to complete some surveys on the north-east coast.
The island of Borneo, throughout the
whole of the N. E. coast, is, with few exceptions,
a low land, covered with jungle; but so beautifully
verdant does it appear when viewed from some distance,
that you would be led to suppose that it was widely
cultivated. This idea is, however, soon dispelled
on a near approach, when you discover the rich groups
of acacias, palms, pandani, and numerous trees
as yet unknown, so luxuriant in themselves, but forming
one entangled mass, alike impenetrable to European
or native. What, in the distant view, we fancied
a verdant meadow, where we might relax from our long
confinement, and amuse ourselves with recreation,
now proved to be ranges of long damp grass, interspersed
with swamps, and infested with venomous snakes.
In short, I never yet was on a coast which, on arriving
on it, promised so much, and, on landing, caused such
a series of disappointments to those who love to ramble
about, than the coast of Borneo. To the naturalist,
however, confined as he is to the shelving beach, there
is ample food for employment and research: the
island abounds in novel objects of natural history,
both in the animal and vegetable kingdom.
Nothing certain is as yet ascertained
relative to the interior of this immense island, if
island it can with propriety be called. From the
accounts of the natives (which, however, must be received
with due caution), it consists of a large plain, devoid
of jungle, and inhabited by cannibals. Two adventurous
Dutchmen have latterly set off from Pontiana, the
Dutch settlement, on an excursion into the interior;
but it is doubtful if they succeed, where so many
others have already failed.
Borneo has but small elevation for
so large an island; in the immediate vicinity of Keeney
Ballu the country is hilly, but by far the greatest
portion of Borneo is but a few feet above the level
of the sea. Keeney Ballu is the highest mountain
in the island, its height is estimated at
14,000 feet or more, and it can be seen
at 150 miles distant on a very clear day. It
is very singular that there should be a mountain of
so great a height rising from an island of otherwise
low land. Near Sarawak there is mountainous country,
where live the Dyaks, previously described, and a
mountain of the name of Santabong, which has already
been made mention of. On the S. E. coast of the
island we saw no elevation of land of any consequence.
I have given a drawing of the mountain of Keeney Ballu,
distant forty miles. At this distance, with the
aid of the glass, you may perceive the numerous cascades
which fall from its summit in every direction.
The Dyaks of Borneo imagine that a lake exists at
the top of this mountain, and that it is to be their
receptacle after death.
As the island is in most parts a flat
and marshy jungle, extending about 200 miles inland,
and the rivers are not rapid, although numerous, it
would be presumed, especially as the dews of the night
are very heavy, that the island would be fatal to
Europeans. Such, however, proved not to be the
case. During our repeated visits to the island
(a period of nearly two years), we only lost one man,
by a most imprudent exposure to the night air, sleeping
in an open boat, without the awning being spread,
and exposed to a very heavy dew.
Borneo abounds with rivers, some of
them very fine, running inland for one or two hundred
miles. Most of these rivers have been taken possession
of and colonised by the various tribes indigenous to
the neighbouring isles and continent, to wit, Arabs,
Malays, Illanoans, Bughis, the natives of Celebes,
Chinese, &c. The reason for this emigration to
Borneo is the protection afforded by these rivers;
for as all these tribes live entirely by piracy, they
here find a safe retreat for themselves and their
vessels. How long ago their settlements may have
been first made, or what opposition they may have received
from the Dyak aborigines, it is impossible to say;
but as most of the head men in Borneo claim to be
of Arab descent, it may be presumed that many years
must have elapsed since the aboriginal tribes of Dyaks
and Dusums were dispossessed of the rivers, and driven
into the interior. Of these people I shall speak
hereafter; there is no doubt but that they were the
original inhabitants of the whole island, and that
the various tribes I have mentioned are but colonists
for piratical purposes.
These piratical hordes generally infest
the high lands upon the shores of these rivers, which
are difficult of navigation; and, moreover, from their
numerous branches, their resorts are not very easily
discovered. These towns are fortified with stockades,
guns of various calibre, and the passage up the river
defended by booms or piles of timber, which admit
of but one narrow passage for their prahus.
It must be understood that these piratical
hordes are not only independent of each other, but
often at war, in consequence of their spoliations.
Some of their chiefs have taken upon them the titles
of princes; and one has assumed, as is well known,
that of Sultan of Borneo, another of Sooloo, how
far entitled to such a rank it would be difficult
to say; but this is certain, that there must be a beginning
to every dynasty; and if we trace back far into history,
we shall find, both at home and abroad, that most
dynasties have had their origin in freebooting on
a grand scale, even the House of Hapsburg
itself is derived from no better an origin; and the
Sultan of Borneo, whoever he may be, and if a Sultan
does exist, some 800 years hence will, by the antiquity
of his title, prove his high descent, as the German
emperor now does his own.
On the 20th of August we came to an
anchor at the mouth of the Sarawak river, where we
remained three weeks completing some very important
surveys. When our work was done, the captain,
accompanied by several officers, went up the river.
On our arrival at Kuchin, we found
the Dido corvette, commanded by Captain Keppell, lying
abreast of the town. We also found that Kuchin
was at present nearly deserted, as the Dido’s
boats, with the Phlegethon steamer, and all the native
war prahus which could be mustered, had proceeded
with Mr. Brooke to the Sakarron, a neighbouring river,
to punish some of the mixed tribes who had lately
been detected in an act of flagrant piracy. On
the change of the tide we started for the Sakarron,
with the hope of gaining the Dido’s boats, and
rendering them some assistance. Our men exerted
themselves to the utmost; but it requires time to
pull eighty miles; and I will therefore, en voyage,
explain more fully the cause and the object of the
expedition.
The river Sakarron, with its tributaries,
the Linga and Serebis, have been for a long while
in the possession of a proverbial piratical tribe
of Malays, governed by chiefs, who are of Arab descent,
and much better acquainted with the art of war than
those lawless communions are in general.
Their towers and fastnesses on the banks of their rivers
they have contrived to fortify in a very superior
manner. Living wholly by the proceeds of their
piratical excursions, and, aware of the efforts made
by the European rajah, Mr. Brooke, to put it down,
they resolved to take the first opportunity which
might offer to show their hostility and contempt to
their new-raised enemy. The occasion soon presented
itself. Seven of the Kuchin Malays, having ventured
in a canoe up the Sakarron river, were all murdered,
and their heads cut off, and kept, as usual, as trophies;
and the intelligence of this outrage communicated by
them to Mr. Brooke, with defiance.
Captain Keppell, of the Dido, had just arrived at Sarawak when this news was
brought to Mr. Brooke. Captain Keppell had been sent by Admiral Sir Thomas
Cochrane to the island on purpose to look out for pirates, and to destroy them
and their nests wherever he could find them. He therefore gladly offered
his assistance to Mr. Brooke to punish these murderous wretches; and the
Phlegethon steamer coming in while they were preparing for the expedition, was,
of course, added to the force employed. This fortunate accession of
strength, assisted by all the Malay war boats which Mr. Brooke could muster,
enabled them to give an effectual check to a band of pirates, so numerous and so
warlike as to have become most formidable. To proceed:
That night we anchored with the last
of the flood at the entrance of the Sakarron.
We had great fear, from the intelligence we had received
from time to time, from boats we fell in with on our
passage, that we should arrive too late to be partakers
of the affray; and so it proved, for the next morning,
while proceeding higher up the river, we perceived
a large force of native boats coming down with the
ebb, and all of them filled to the gunwale with plunder.
The Malay and Dyak canoes are made
out of a hollowed tree, or, as they are termed in
many ports of India, “dug-outs.” They
are long and narrow, and are capable of being propelled
with great swiftness. Although very easy to capsize,
they are constantly loaded till so deep that at the
least inclination the water pours over the gunwale,
and one man is usually employed baling with a scoop
made out of a banana leaf. Custom, however, makes
them so used to keep the equilibrium, that you often
see the Dyaks, whose canoes are similar to the Malays’,
standing upright and propelling them with their spears.
The Malay war-boat, or prahu,
is built of timber at the lower part, the upper is
of bamboo, rattan, and kedgang (the dried leaf of the
Nepa palm). Outside the bends, about a foot from
the water line, runs a strong gallery, in which the
rowers sit cross-legged. At the after-part of
the boat is a cabin for the chief who commands, and
the whole of the vessel is surmounted by a strong
flat roof, upon which they fight, their principal
weapons being the kris and spear, both of which, to
be used with effect, require elbow-room.
The Dyak war-boat is a long built
canoe, more substantially constructed than the prahu
of the Malays, and sufficiently capacious to hold from
seventy to eighty men. This also has a roof to
fight from. They are generally painted, and the
stern ornamented with feathers.
Both descriptions of war-boats are remarkably swift, notwithstanding such
apparent top-weight. To proceed:
We hove to, to speak to those on board
of the canoes, and were informed by them that the
pirates had sustained a severe defeat, and that the
European force was about to descend the river on their
return to Kuchin. As a proof of the victory having
been gained, they produced several heads which had
been taken in the fight.
We proceeded about six miles further
up the river, when we discovered the European boats
and crews lying at anchor abreast of the smoking ruins
of what had been a Malay town. Here we learnt
that the pirates had been completely routed, after
a desperate resistance, that four large towns had
been burnt, and seventy-five brass guns of the country,
called leilas, had been captured. The victory,
however, had not been gained without loss on our side,
and had the pirates been better prepared, we must
have suffered much more. Several of the people
of Kuchin had been killed, and of Europeans we had
to lament the loss of Mr. Wade, first lieutenant of
the Dido, and formerly of the Samarang, and Mr. Stewart,
one of the residents at Kuchin; the latter gentleman
lost his life by an excess of zeal which quite overcame
all prudence. Mr. Wade had landed with his men
after an attack and capture of a fort, and when in
advance received a bullet in the heart. He fell
instantly dead; his body was recovered by his shipmates,
and borne to the boat, and during a temporary cessation
of hostilities was conveyed to the river. His
loss was much deplored by his shipmates in both vessels,
by whom he was respected as an officer, and beloved
as a friend.
Mr. Stewart, pulling in advance in
a small canoe, with some of the natives belonging
to Kuchin, was suddenly pounced upon by three or four
of the enemy’s prahus full of men. They
ran down the canoe, and thus were Mr. Stewart and
his companions at their mercy. Mercy! a
wrong term to use when speaking of those who never
show any. They were all krissed, to the number
of seventeen, in sight of their companions in the other
boats, who were too far behind to arrive in time to
render them any assistance, although it hardly need
be said that every effort was made. The last
that was seen of poor Stewart was his body being carried
by one of the Dyaks into the jungle by the side of
the river, and the fellow was so anxious to obtain
the much-valued trophy of a white man’s head,
that, as he bore it along, he kept his knife sawing
at the head to sever it from the body. Indeed,
so much do these people value a white man’s
head, that they will build a separate room on purpose
to contain it.
Whilst lying at this place, riding
to a strong flood tide, a canoe floated past us, in
which we could discern two dead bodies; they were
both dressed as Malays, and the garments were good.
Over the bows of the canoe there hung a handsomely
ornamented kris. We tried to hook the canoe with
the boat-hook, but the strength of the tide was so
great that we could not succeed in securing it, and
it floated away with the stream. We presumed
that they were the bodies of some of the Malays killed
in the recent conflict, who probably inhabited a higher
portion of the river, and that they had been put into
the canoe by their friends to be carried home, and
had been swept away by the tide from not having been
securely fastened, for nothing would have induced the
enemy thus to make us a present of two heads.
“We weighed, in company with
the steamer and boats, on the same evening, and returned
to Kuchin, where we arrived on the following day.
The men-of-war boats having been towed by the steamer,
we arrived some time before the native prahus belonging
to the river, which had accompanied us. On the
following day they arrived, and the scene was novel
and interesting. They all rounded the point together,
dressed out with flags of all descriptions, beating
their gongs and tom-toms, and firing blank cartridges
from their “Leilas.” Highly elated
with their victory, and with the plunder which had
accompanied it, they celebrated it by all getting
excessively drunk that night upon shamsoo.
We remained at Kuchin for three days,
enjoying Mr. Brooke’s hospitality; and during
that time it was proposed and arranged that we should
pay a visit to the river Loondoo, the residence of
a very remarkable tribe of Dyaks under Mr. Brooke’s
authority; but not being able to fix the exact period
for the visit, on that night we returned to the ship.
We had not been much more than twenty-four
hours on board, when the captain, who had been away,
returned at midnight; and, at this unusual hour, ordered
all the boats, manned and armed, to be piped away
immediately. We were informed that the river Sakarron
was again our destination; and at four o’clock
in the morning we started, with fourteen days’
provisions, and armed to the teeth, to join the Dido’s
boats at the mouth of the river Morotabis, from thence
to be towed with them by the steamer to our destination.
The cause of this new expedition was the intelligence
that the Arab chief, Serib Saib, who had escaped during
the late conflict, had returned to the Sakarron to
collect together and re-organize his piratical subjects.
We soon arrived at the same spot which we had before
visited when the town had been burnt down; but the
expedition proved to be one of little interest.
Notwithstanding his threats, Serib Saib’s confidence
gave way at the approach of our force, and he made
a precipitate retreat up the river, accompanied by
four or five hundred of his warriors. Nevertheless,
we continued to force our way up the river, with the
expectation that, when fairly at bay, he would make
a stand. Our advance was made known to the enemy
by fires lighted on the different hills abreast of
the boats. This speedy mode of communication
is adopted by all the natives in this part of the
world. Determined not to abandon the pursuit while
a chance remained, we followed the redoubtable Serib
Saib for eighty miles up the river, which in some
parts was too narrow for our boats’ crews to
make use of their oars; but all obstacles were overcome
in the ardour of the chase.
To impede our progress, large trees
had been felled so as to fall across the river where
it was narrow; but these were removed, and we forced
our way on. At last the river, as we approached
the source, became little wider than a ditch, the
barges grounded, and could proceed no farther; the
gigs only could float, and we continued, till, after
forty-eight hours of severe labour, we found ourselves
at the head of the river; and we also discovered that
Serib Saib had escaped, having with his whole force
landed, and made his way through the jungle into the
interior, leaving at our disposal the forty war canoes
which had carried him and his men. To follow
him was impossible; so we were obliged to content
ourselves with the capture of the war canoes, which
were all that we had to show for our exertions.
Disappointed, and hungry withal, we were not sorry
to find ourselves once more with our heads down the
river.
I must not omit, however, to narrate
a little trick played upon our gallant captain.
I have stated that the river was so narrow near its
source that we could not use the oars, and the gigs,
which continued the pursuit, had to be hauled through
the bushes by the boat-hooks. Returning to where
the larger boats had been left aground, our bow-man,
who was employed shooting the gig along by such aid
as the branches of the trees, or the tendrils which
hung to them, afforded him, stuck his boat-hook into
what appeared to be a suspended ball of moss; but he
soon discovered that it was something more, as it
was a nest of hornets, which sallied out in great
numbers, and resented the insult to their domicile
by attacking the bowman first, as the principal aggressor,
and us afterwards, as parties concerned. Now
the sting of a hornet is no joke; we covered our faces
with our handkerchiefs, or any thing we could find,
and made a hasty retreat from the spot, pushing the
gig down the stream, till we were clear of their attacks.
In the hurry of our escape we left the boat-hook hanging
in the hornet’s nest, and not feeling at all
inclined to go back for it, we hailed the captain’s
gig, which was following us, and requested very humbly
that they would be pleased to recover our boat-hook
for us, as we could not well re-ascend the stream
from the want of it. As we did not mention that
it was so peculiarly situated, the captain saw no
objection, and as they came to where it hung, his
bow-man caught hold of the staff, and wrested it from
its position; but this time such force was used that
the tendril gave way, and the nest itself fell down
into the boat, and the irritated insects poured out
their whole force to revenge this second aggression.
The insects after all appeared to have a knowledge
of the service, for they served out their stings in
the same proportion as the prize-money is divided:
the captain came in for his full share.
Returning rather in a bad humour at
having had so long a pull for nothing, we anchored
off a fortified Malay town, which went by the name
of Bintang, and which had been brought to terms by
Captain Keppell on a previous expedition up the river.
The people had consequently remained neutral, although
it was well known that they were not to be trusted,
and that, had we been defeated above and beaten back,
they would, in all probability, have attacked us in
the rear. As the evening closed in, by way of
astonishing the natives, and giving them some idea
of our perfect equipment, the boats were directed
to give a feu-de-joie. Some fifteen guns,
with rockets, port-fires, blue lights, supported by
a well-sustained roulade of musketry, had a very warlike
effect; and, no doubt, gave the natives an impression
of our superiority in the use of fire-arms. At
the conclusion, Captain Keppell, who was always ready
for fun, gave out the order that all hands were to
join in “God save the Queen,” taking the
time from him. A dead silence was immediately
produced, waiting for him to lead off, which he did;
but, to our great amusement, he, by mistake, commenced
with “Rule Britannia;” and this, being
more to the seamen’s taste, certainly, as far
as lungs were concerned, was done most ample justice
to.
The saying is, “No song no supper;”
of course it must be presumed that a song deserves
a supper. It proved so in this instance; for just
as the chorus was hushed, the Sultan of Bintang, as
he styles himself, sent off to the head boat (the
one I happened to be in) a superb supper for seven
people, consisting of seven bronze trays, each tray
containing about a dozen small plates, in which were
many varieties of flesh and fowl cooked in a very
superior manner. To each tray was a spoon, made
of the yellow leaf of some tree unknown; but, as specimens
of primitive elegance and utility combined, they were
matchless. We had some doubts, from our knowledge
of the treachery of the Malays, whether we should
fall to upon these appetising viands, as there was
no saying but that they might be poisoned. Mr.
Brooke, however, who, although not the commandant,
was the mentor of the party, explained that he invariably
observed one rule when treating and dealing with these
people, which was, never to exhibit any
unworthy suspicion of them, as, by so doing, they
became convinced of our own integrity and honour.
That this confidence might have, in many instances,
proved dangerous, unless adopted with great caution,
must be admitted; but in our relations with the people
on the rivers of Borneo it was of great service.
The Malays are so very suspicious themselves, that
nothing but confidence on your part will remove the
feeling; and, in treating with Malays, this is the
first object to be obtained. The remarks of Mr.
Brooke, which were not a little assisted by the tempting
nature of the viands, and no small degree of hunger,
had the effect, and the trays were all cleared out
in consequence.
While I was in this river I was capsized
by a bore. This, I must explain to my
non-nautical readers, is a huge rolling wave, which
is as upright as a wall, and travels almost as fast
as a locomotive. It is occasioned by the flood
tide pouring in and overcoming the feeders to the
river, forcing them back to their source. On this
occasion I was pulling down the river in a small gig,
following the other boats, which had turned up another
branch of it, when I perceived it rapidly advancing,
and making a noise not unlike the animal of the same
name, only a great deal louder. Had I been steering
a straight course down the river I should have faced
it, and probably have got off with the boat half full
of water; but I calculated upon reaching the point
and entering the branch of the river before its arrival.
But I had not calculated upon its speed, and a strong
eddy current at the point was wicked enough to draw
our boat broadside to the middle of the stream.
The wall of water rushed on us, turned
us over and over; but fortunately by its force it
also threw us all, with the gig, upon the point.
It did not, however, throw us our oars, which were
performing a pas de quatre in a whirlpool close
to us. This was a narrow escape, as, had we remained
in the agitated waters, the alligators would soon have
dragged us under. For two minutes the river was
in a state of ebullition, but gradually subsided.
We then launched the boat, regained our oars, and
proceeded to join our comrades. Thankful as we
were for our lives having been preserved, still as
we were wet through and had lost all our provisions
and necessaries, we were compelled to admit that it
was a very great bore.
Shortly after our leaving this river
a fatal accident happened to one of our best men.
The wind was blowing a heavy gale from the westward,
accompanied by thunder and lightning, such as is only
to be seen and heard on the coast of Borneo.
The carpenters were on shore felling trees for masts
and yards, and as we were anchored some distance from
the shore a tent was pitched for their accommodation.
They had not been in the tent long when a large iron-wood
tree was struck by lightning, and fell, burying one
of the carpenters, Miller by name, in the sand underneath
it. He was extricated with great difficulty; but
before any surgical assistance could be rendered him
he was a corpse. On examination most of his bones
were found to be crushed.
Soon after our return from the Sakarron
the expedition to Loondoo was arranged, and we started
in the barge and gig, accompanied by Captain Keppell
in his own boat, and Mr. Brooke and Hentig in one of
the native boats, called a Tam-bang. The distance
was about forty miles, and we should have arrived
at four o’clock in the afternoon, but, owing
to the narrowness of the channel, and a want of knowledge
of the river, we grounded on the flats, where we lay
high and dry for the space of four hours. Floating
with the following tide, we discovered the proper
channel, and found our way up the river, although the
night was dark as pitch: when near the town,
we anchored for daylight.
I may as well here give a slight description
of the scenery on the Borneo rivers, all of which,
that we have visited, with the exception of the Bruni,
bear a close resemblance to each other. They are
far from picturesque or beautiful, for the banks are
generally low, and the jungle invariably extends to
the water’s edge. For the first fifteen
or twenty miles the banks are lined with the nepa-palms,
which then gradually disappear, leaving the mangrove
alone to clothe the sides of the stream. When
you enter these rivers, it is rare to see any thing
like a human habitation for many miles; reach after
reach, the same double line of rich foliage is presented,
varying only in the description of trees and bushes
as the water becomes more fresh; now and then a small
canoe may be seen rounding a point, or you may pass
the stakes which denote that formerly there had been
a fishing station. At last a hut appears on the
bank, probably flanked with one or two Banana trees.
You turn into the next reach and suddenly find yourself
close to one or more populous and fortified towns.
As you ascend higher the scenery becomes much more
interesting and varied from the mangroves disappearing.
Few of the rivers of Borneo are more than eighty miles
in extent. The two rivers of Bruni and Coran
are supposed to meet in the centre of the island,
although for many miles near their source they are
not much wider than a common ditch.
Before day-light of the following
morning our slumbers were disturbed by the crowing
of a whole army of cocks, which assured us of the
proximity of the town we were in search of. We
got under weigh, and, rounding the point, Loondoo
hove in sight, a fine town, built in a grove of cocoa-nut
trees, and by no means despicably fortified. We
found our progress arrested by a boom composed of
huge trees fastened together by coir cables, and extending
the whole width of the river. Had our intentions
been hostile, it would have taken some time to have
cut the fastenings of this boom, and we should, during
the operation, have been exposed to a double line
of fire from two forts raised on each side of the
river. The Chief of Loondoo had, however, been
duly advised of our intended visit, and as soon as
our boats were seen from the town, a head-man was
sent out in a canoe to usher us in. After a little
delay we got the barge within the boom. When
within, we found that we had further reason to congratulate
ourselves that we came as friends, as the raking fire
from the forts would have been most effectual, for
we discovered that we had to pass an inner boom equally
well secured as the first. The town was surrounded
by a strong stockade made of the trunks of the knee-bone
palm, a wood superior in durability to any known.
This stockade had but one opening of any dimensions.
A few strokes of the oars brought us abreast of it,
and we let go our anchors. The eldest son of
the Chief came to us immediately in a canoe. He
was a splendidly formed young man, about twenty-five
years old. He wore his hair long and flowing,
his countenance was open and ingenuous, his eyes black
and knowing. His dress was a light blue velvet
jacket without sleeves, and a many-coloured sash wound
round his waist. His arms and legs, which were
symmetrical to admiration, were naked, but encircled
with a profusion of heavy brass rings. He brought
a present of fowls, cocoa-nuts, and bananas to Mr.
Brooke from his father, and an invitation for us to
pay him a visit at his house whenever we should feel
inclined.
Preparatory to landing, we began performing
our ablutions in the boat, much to the amusement and
delight of the naked groups of Dyaks who were assembled
at the landing place, and who eyed us in mute astonishment.
The application of a hair brush was the signal for
a general burst of laughter, but cleaning the teeth
with a tooth brush caused a scream of wonder, a perfect
yell, I presume at our barbarous customs. There
were many women among the groups; they appeared to
be well made, and more than tolerably good looking.
I need not enter into a very minute description of
their attire, for, truth to say, they had advanced
very little beyond the costume of our common mother
Eve. We were soon in closer contact with them,
for one of our party throwing out of the boat a common
black bottle, half a dozen of the women plunged into
the stream to gain possession of it. They swam
to the side of our boat without any reserve, and then
a struggle ensued as to who should be the fortunate
owner of the prize. It was gained by a fine young
girl of about seventeen years of age, and who had
a splendid pair of black eyes. She swam like
a frog, and with her long hair streaming in the water
behind her, came pretty well up to our ideas of a
mermaid.
As we had contrived to empty a considerable
number of these bottles during our expedition, they
were now thrown overboard in every direction.
This occasioned a great increase of the floating party,
it being joined by all the other women on the beach,
and for more than half an hour we amused ourselves
with the exertions and contentions of our charming
naiads, to obtain what they appeared to prize so much;
at last all our empty bottles were gone, and the women
swam on shore with them, as much delighted with their
spoil as we had been amused with their eagerness and
activity.
About 10 o’clock we landed,
and proceeded to pay our visit to the Chief.
We were ushered into a spacious house, built of wood
and thatched with leaves, capable of containing at
least 400 people. The Chief was sitting on a
mat with his three sons by his side, and attended by
all his warriors. The remainder of the space
within was occupied by as many of the natives as could
find room; those who could not, remained in the court-yard
outside. The Chief, who was a fine looking grey-bearded
man of about sixty years of age, was dressed in velvet,
and wore on his head a turban of embroidered silk.
The three sons were dressed in the way I have already
described the one to have been who came to us in the
canoe. Without exception, those three young men
were the most symmetrical in form I have ever seen.
The unrestrained state of nature in which these Dyaks
live, gives to them a natural grace and an easiness
of posture, which is their chief characteristic.
After the usual greetings and salutations had been
passed through, we all sat down on mats and cushions
which had been arranged for us; a short conversation
with Mr. Brooke, who speaks the language fluently,
then took place between him and the Chief, after which
refreshments were set before us. These consisted
of various eatables and sweetmeats made of rice, honey,
sugar, flour, and oil; and although very simple as
a confectionery, they were very palatable. We
remained with the Chief about an hour, and before we
went away he requested our company in the evening,
promising to treat us with a Dyak war dance.
We took our leave for the present, and amused ourselves
with strolling about the town. I will take this
opportunity of making known some information I have
at this and at different times obtained relative to
this people.
The villages of the Dyaks are always
built high up, near the source of the rivers, or,
should the river below be occupied by the piratical
tribes, on the hills adjoining to the source.
Their houses are very large, capable of containing
two hundred people, and are built of palm leaves.
A village or town may consist of fifteen or twenty
houses. Several families reside in one house,
divided from each other by only a slight partition
of mats. Here they take their meals, and employ
themselves, without interfering with each other.
Their furniture and property are very simple, consisting
of a few cooking utensils, the paddles of their canoes,
their arms, and a few mats.
In all the Dyak villages every precaution
is taken to guard against surprise. I have already
described the strength and fortifications of Loondoo,
and a similar principle is every where adopted.
The town being built on the banks of the river, the
boom I have described is invariably laid across the
stream to prevent the ascent of boats. Commanding
the barriers, one or more forts are built on an eminence,
mounting within them five or six of the native guns,
called leilas. The forts are surrounded
by a strong stockade, which is surmounted by a cheveaux-de-frise
of split bamboos. These stockaded forts are, with
the houses and cocoa nuts adjoining, again surrounded
by a strong stockade, which effectually secures them
from any night attack.
Great respect is paid to the laws
and to the mandates of their Chiefs, although it but
too often happens that, stimulated by revenge, or other
passions, they take the law into their own hands; but
if crimes are committed, they are not committed without
punishment following them, and some of their punishments
are very barbarous and cruel: I have seen a woman
with both her hands half-severed at the wrists, and
a man with both his ears cut off.
The religious ideas of the Dyaks resemble
those of the North American Indians: they acknowledge
a Supreme Being, or “Great Spirit;” they
have also some conception of an hereafter. Many
of the tribes imagine that the great mountain Keney
Balloo is a place of punishment for guilty departed
souls. They are very scrupulous regarding their
cemeteries, paying the greatest respect to the graves
of their ancestors. When a tribe quits one place
to reside at another, they exhume the bones of their
relations, and take them with them.
I could not discover if they had any
marriage ceremony, but they are very jealous of their
wives, and visit with great severity any indiscretion
on their parts.
The Dyaks live principally upon rice,
fish, and fruit, and they are very moderate in their
living. They extract shamshoo from the palm, but
seldom drink it Their principal luxury consists in
the chewing the betel-nut and chunam; a habit in which,
like all the other inhabitants of these regions, from
Arracan down to the island of New Guinea, they indulge
to excess. This habit is any thing but becoming,
as it renders the teeth quite black, and the lips
of a high vermilion, neither of which alterations
is any improvement to a copper-coloured face.
They both chew and smoke tobacco,
but they do not use pipes for smoking; they roll up
the tobacco in a strip of dried leaf, take three or
four whiffs, emitting the smoke through their nostrils,
and then they extinguish it. They are fond of
placing a small roll of tobacco between the upper
lip and gums, and allow it to remain there for hours.
Opium is never used by them, and I doubt if they are
acquainted with its properties.
They seldom cultivate more land than
is requisite for the rice, yams, and sago for their
own consumption, their time being chiefly employed
in hunting and fishing. They appear to me to
be far from an industrious race of people, and I have
often observed hundreds of fine-looking fellows lolling
and sauntering about, seeming to have no cares beyond
the present. Some tribes that I visited preferred
obtaining their rice in exchange from others, to the
labour of planting it themselves. They are, in
fact, not agriculturally inclined, but always ready
for barter.
They are middle-sized, averaging five
feet five inches, but very strong-built and well-conditioned,
and with limbs beautifully proportioned. In features
they differ very much from the piratical inhabitants
of these rivers. The head is finely formed, the
hair, slightly shaven in front, is all thrown to the
back of the head; their cheek-bones are high, eyes
small, black and piercing, nose not exactly flat indeed
in some cases I have seen it rather aquiline; the mouth
is large, and lips rather thick, and there is a total
absence of hair on the face and eyebrows. Now
the above description is not very much unlike that
of an African; and yet they are very unlike, arising,
I believe, from the very pleasing and frank expression
of their countenances, which is their only beauty.
This description, however, must not be considered
as applicable to the whole of these tribes, those
on the S. E. coast of the island being by no means
so well-favoured.
The different tribes are more distinguishable
by their costumes than by their manners. The
Dyaks of Loondoo are quite naked, and cover the arms
and legs with brass rings. Those of Serebis and
Linga are remarkable for wearing as many as ten to
fifteen large rings in their ears. The Dusums,
a tribe of Dyaks on the north coast, wear immense rings
of solid tin or copper round their hips and shoulders,
while the Saghai Dyaks of the S. E. are dressed in
tigers’ skins and rich cloth, with splendid
head-dresses, made out of monkeys’ skins and
the feathers of the Argus pheasant.
The invariable custom of filing the
teeth sharp, combined with the use of the betel-nut
turning them quite black, gives their profile a very
strange appearance. Sometimes they render their
teeth concave by filing.
Their arms consist of the blow-pipe
(sum-pi-tan), from which they eject small arrows,
poisoned with the juice of the upas; a long sharp knife,
termed pa-rang; a spear, and a shield. They are
seldom without their arms, for the spear is used in
hunting, the knife for cutting leaves, and the sum-pi-tan
for shooting small birds. Their warfare is carried
on more by treachery and stratagem than open fighting they
are all warriors, and seldom at peace. The powerful
tribes which reside on the banks of the river generally
possess several war prahus, capable of holding from
twenty to thirty men, and mounting a brass gun (leila)
on her bows, carrying a ball of one to two pounds
weight. These prahus, when an expedition is to
be made against a neighbouring tribe, are manned by
the warriors, one or two of the most consequential
men being stationed in each prahu. Before they
start upon an expedition, like the North American
Indians, they perform their war dance.
Should their enemies have gained intelligence
of the meditated attack, they take the precaution
of sending away their women, children, and furniture,
into the jungle, and place men in ambush on the banks
of the river, who attack the assailants as they advance.
The Dyaks are all very brave, and fight desperately,
yelling during the combat like the American Indians.
The great object in their combats is to obtain as many
of the heads of the party opposed as possible; and
if they succeed in their surprise of the town or village,
the heads of the women and children are equally carried
off as trophies. But there is great difficulty
in obtaining a head, for the moment that a man falls
every effort is made by his own party to carry off
the body, and prevent the enemy from obtaining such
a trophy. If the attacking party are completely
victorious, they finish their work of destruction by
setting fire to all the houses, and cutting down all
the cocoa-nut trees; after which they return home
in triumph with their spoil. As soon as they
arrive another war dance is performed; and after making
very merry, they deposit the heads which they have
obtained in the head-house. Now, putting scalps
for heads, the reader will perceive that their customs
are nearly those of the American Indians.
Every Dyak village has its head-house:
it is generally the hall of audience as well.
The interior is decorated with heads piled up in pyramids
to the roof: of course the greater the number
of heads the more celebrated they are as warriors.
The women of the north-east coast
are by no means bad-looking, but very inferior to
the mountain Dyaks before described. I have seen
one or two faces which might be considered as pretty.
With the exception of a cloth, which is secured above
the hips with a hoop of rattan, and descends down
to the knees, they expose every other portion of their
bodies. Their hair, which is fine and black, generally
falls down behind. Their feet are bare.
Like the American squaws, they do all the drudgery,
carry the water, and paddle the canoes. They generally
fled at our approach, if we came unexpectedly.
The best looking I ever saw was one we captured on
the river Sakarron. She was in a dreadful fright,
expecting every moment to be killed, probably taking
it for granted that we had our head-houses to decorate
as well as their husbands. While lying off the
town of Baloongan, expecting hostilities to ensue,
we observed that the women who came down to fill their
bamboos with water were all armed.
And now to resume the narrative of our proceedings:
I stated that after our interview
with the old chief, and promising to return in the
evening to witness a war dance, we proceeded on a stroll,
accompanied by the chiefs eldest son, who acted as
our guide, and followed by a large party of the natives.
We first examined the forts: these were in a
tolerable state of efficiency, but their gunpowder
was coarse and bad. We next went over the naval
arsenal, for being then at peace with every body,
their prahus were hauled up under cover of sheds.
One of them was a fine boat, about forty feet long,
mounting a gun, and capable of containing forty or
fifty men. She was very gaily decorated with
paint and feathers, and had done good service on the
Sakarron river in a late war. These war prahus
have a flat strong roof, from which they fight, although
they are wholly exposed to the spears and arrows of
the enemy.
We then invaded their domestic privacy,
by entering the houses, and proceeded to an inspection
of the blacksmith’s shop, where we found the
chiefs youngest son, with his velvet jacket thrown
aside, working away at a piece of iron, which he was
fashioning into a pa-rang, or Dyak knife. The
Dyak pa-rang has been confounded with the Malay kris,
but they differ materially. The Dyaks, I believe,
seldom use the kris, and the Malays never use the
knife; and I observed, when we visited the south coast
of Borneo, that the knife and other arms of the tribes
inhabiting this portion, were precisely similar to
those of the Dyaks on the northern coast. Customs
so universal and so strictly adhered to proves not
only individuality, but antiquity. Having examined
every thing and every body, we were pretty well tired,
and were not sorry that the hour had now arrived at
which we were again to repair to the house of the
rajah.
On our arrival we found the rajah
where we left him, and all the chief men and warriors
assembled. Refreshments had been prepared for
us, and we again swallowed various mysterious confections,
which, as I before observed, would have been very
good if we had been hungry. As soon as the eatables
had been despatched, we lighted our cheroots, and having,
by a dexterous and unperceived application out of a
brandy bottle, succeeded in changing the rajah’s
lemonade into excellent punch, we smoked and drank
until the rajah requested to know if we were ready
to witness the promised war dance. Having expressed
our wishes in the affirmative, the music struck up;
it consisted of gongs and tom-toms. The Malay
gong, which the Dyaks also make use of, is like the
Javanese, thick with a broad rim, and very different
from the gong of the Chinese. Instead of the
clanging noise of the latter, it gives out a muffled
sound of a deep tone. The gong and tom-tom are
used by the Dyaks and Malays in war, and for signals
at night, and the Dyaks procure them from the Malays.
I said that the music struck up, for, rude as the
instruments were, they modulate the sound, and keep
time so admirably, that it was any thing but inharmonious.
A space was now cleared in the centre
of the house, and two of the oldest warriors stepped
into it. They were dressed in turbans, long loose
jackets, sashes round their waists descending to their
feet, and small bells were attached to their ankles.
They commenced by first shaking hands with the rajah,
and then with all the Europeans present, thereby giving
us to understand, as was explained to us, that the
dance was to be considered only as a spectacle, and
not to be taken in its literal sense, as preparatory
to an attack upon us, a view of the case in which
we fully coincided with them.
This ceremony being over, they rushed
into the centre and gave a most unearthly scream,
then poising themselves on one foot they described
a circle with the other, at the same time extending
their arms like the wings of a bird, and then meeting
their hands, clapping them and keeping time with the
music. After a little while the music became louder,
and suddenly our ears were pierced with the whole
of the natives present joining in the hideous war
cry. Then the motions and the screams of the
dancers became more violent, and every thing was working
up to a state of excitement by which even we were
influenced. Suddenly a very unpleasant odour
pervaded the room, already too warm from the numbers
it contained. Involuntarily we held our noses,
wondering what might be the cause, when we perceived
that one of the warriors had stepped into the centre
and suspended round the shoulders of each dancer a
human head in a wide meshed basket of rattan.
These heads had been taken in the late Sakarron business,
and were therefore but a fortnight old. They were
encased in a wide net work of rattan, and were ornamented
with beads. Their stench was intolerable, although,
as we discovered upon after examination, when they
were suspended against the wall, they had been partially
baked and were quite black. The teeth and hair
were quite perfect, the features somewhat shrunk,
and they were altogether very fair specimens of pickled
heads; but our worthy friends required a lesson from
the New Zealanders in the art of preserving. The
appearance of the heads was the signal for the music
to play louder, for the war cry of the natives to
be more energetic, and for the screams of the dancers
to be more piercing. Their motions now became
more rapid, and the excitement in proportion.
Their eyes glistened with unwonted brightness.
The perspiration dropped down their faces, and thus
did yelling, dancing, gongs, and tom-toms become more
rapid and more violent every minute, till the dancing
warriors were ready to drop. A farewell yell,
with emphasis, was given by the surrounding warriors;
immediately the music ceased, the dancers disappeared,
and the tumultuous excitement and noise was succeeded
by a dead silence. Such was the excitement communicated,
that when it was all over we ourselves remained for
some time panting to recover our breath. Again
we lighted our cheroots and smoked for a while the
pipe of peace.
A quarter of an hour elapsed and the
preparations were made for another martial dance.
This was performed by two of the rajah’s sons,
the same young men I have previously made mention
of. They came forward each having on his arm
one of the large Dyak shields, and in the centre of
the cleared space were two long swords lying on the
floor. The ceremony of shaking hands, as described
preparatory to the former dance, was first gone through;
the music then struck up and they entered the arena.
At first they confined themselves to evolutions of
defence, springing from one side to the other with
wonderful quickness, keeping their shields in front
of them, falling on one knee and performing various
feats of agility. After a short time, they each
seized a sword, and then the display was very remarkable,
and proved what ugly customers they must be in single
conflict. Blows in every direction, feints of
every description, were made by both, but invariably
received upon the shields. Cumbrous as these
shields were, no opening was ever left, retreating,
pursuing, dodging, and striking, the body was never
exposed. Occasionally, during this performance,
the war cry was given by the surrounding warriors,
but the combatants held their peace; in fact they
could not afford to open their mouths, lest an opening
should be made. It was a most masterly performance,
and we were delighted with it.
As the evening advanced into night,
we had a sort of extemporary drama, reminding us of
one of the dances, as they are called, of the American
Indians, in which the warriors tell their deeds of
prowess. This was performed by two of the principal
and oldest warriors, who appeared in long white robes,
with long staves in their hands. They paraded
up and down the centre, alternately haranguing each
other; the subject was the praise of their own rulers,
a relation of their own exploits, and an exhortation
to the young warriors to emulate their deeds.
This performance was most tedious; it lasted for about
three hours, and, as we could not understand a word
that was said, it was not peculiarly interesting.
It, however, had one good effect: it sent us all
asleep. I fell asleep before the others, I am
told; very possible. I certainly woke up the
first, and on waking, found that all the lights were
out, and that the rajah and the whole company had
disappeared, with the exception of my European friends,
who were all lying around me. My cheroot was
still in my mouth, so I re-lighted it and smoked it,
and then again lay down by the side of my companions.
Such was the wind-up of our visit to the rajah, who
first excited us by his melodramas, and then sent
us to sleep with his recitations.
The next morning, at daylight, we
repaired to our boats, and when all was ready took
leave of the old rajah. The rajah’s eldest
son had promised to accompany us to the mouth of the
river, and show us how the natives hunted the wild
pigs, which are very numerous in all the jungles of
Borneo.
We got under weigh and proceeded down
the river accompanied by a large canoe, which was
occupied by the rajah’s son, six or seven hunters,
and a pack of the dogs used in hunting the wild boar
on this island. These dogs were small, but very
wiry, with muzzles like foxes, and curling tails.
Their hair was short, and of a tan colour. Small
as they are, they are very bold, and one of them will
keep a wild pig at bay till the hunters come up to
him.
We arrived at the hunting ground at
the mouth of the river in good time, before the scent
was off, and landed in the Tam-bang. Our
captain having a survey to make of an island at the
mouth of the river, to our great delight took away
the barge and gig, leaving Mr. Brooke, Hentig, Captain
Keppell, Adams, and myself, to accompany the rajah’s
son. Having arranged that the native boat should
pull along the coast in the direction that we were
to walk, and having put on board the little that we
had collected for our dinners, we shouldered our guns
and followed the hunters and dogs. The natives
who accompanied us were naked, and armed only with
a spear. They entered the jungle with the dogs,
rather too fatiguing an exercise for us, and we contented
ourselves with walking along the beach abreast of
them, waiting very patiently for the game to be started.
In a very few minutes the dogs gave tongue, and as
the noise continued we presumed that a boar was on
foot; nor were we wrong in our conjecture; the barking
of the dogs ceased, and one of the hunters came out
of the jungle to us with a fine pig on his back, which
he had transfixed with his spear. Nor were we
long without our share of the sport, for we suddenly
came upon a whole herd which had been driven out of
the jungle, and our bullets did execution. We
afterwards had more shots, and with what we killed
on the beach, and the natives secured in the jungle,
as the evening advanced we found ourselves in possession
of eight fine grown animals. These the rajah’s
son and his hunters very politely requested our acceptance
of. We now had quite sufficient materials for
our dinner, and as we were literally as hungry as
hunters, we were most anxious to fall to, and looked
upon our pigs with very cannibal eyes. The first
thing necessary was to light a fire, and for the first
time I had an opportunity of seeing the Dyak way of
obtaining it. It differs slightly from the usual
manner, and is best explained by a sketch. Captain
Keppell, who was always the life and soul of every
thing, whether it was a fight or a pic nic, was unanimously
elected caterer, and in that capacity he was most brilliant.
I must digress a little to bestow upon that officer
the meed of universal opinion; for his kindness, mirth,
and goodness of heart, have rendered him a favourite
wherever he has been known, not only a favourite with
the officers, but even more so, if possible, with the
men. In the expeditions in which Keppell has
been commanding officer, where the men were worn out
with continued exertion at the oar, and with the many
obstacles to be overcome, Keppell’s voice would
be heard, and when heard, the men were encouraged
and renewed their endeavours. Keppell’s
stock, when provisions were running short, and with
small hopes of a fresh supply, was freely shared among
those about him, while our gallant captain, with a
boat half filled with his own hampers, would see, and
appeared pleased to see, those in his company longing
for a mouthful which never would be offered.
If any of the youngsters belonging to other ships
were, from carelessness or ignorance, in trouble with
the commanding officers, it was to Keppell that they
applied, and it was Keppell who was the intercessor.
In fact, every occasion in which kindness, generosity,
or consideration for others could be shown, such an
opportunity was never lost by Keppell, who, to sum
up, was a beloved friend, a delightful companion,
and a respected commander. As soon as our fire
was lighted, we set to, under Keppell’s directions,
and, as may be supposed, as we had little or nothing
else, pork was our principal dish. In fact, we
had pig at the top, pig at the bottom, pig in the
centre, and pig at the sides. A Jew would have
made but a sorry repast, but we, emancipated Christians,
made a most ravenous one, defying Moses and all his
Deuteronomy. We had plenty of wine and segars,
and soon found ourselves very comfortably seated on
the sand, still warm from the rays of the burning
mid-day sun. Towards the end of a long repast
we felt a little chilly, and we therefore rose and
indulged in the games of leap-frog, fly-the-garter,
and other venturous amusements. We certainly
had in our party one or two who were as well fitted
to grace the senate as to play at leap-frog, but I
have always observed that the cleverest men are the
most like children when an opportunity is offered for
relaxation. I don’t know what the natives
thought of the European Rajah Brooke playing at leap-frog,
but it is certain that the rajah did not care what
they thought. I have said little of Mr. Brooke,
but I will now say that a more mild, amiable, and
celebrated person I never knew. Every one loved
him, and he deserved it.
After we had warmed ourselves with
play, we lighted an enormous fire to keep off the
mosquitoes, and made a bowl of grog to keep off the
effects of the night air, which is occasionally very
pernicious. We smoked and quaffed, and had many
a merry song and many a witty remark, and many a laugh
about nothing on that night. As it is highly imprudent
to sleep in the open air in Borneo, at ten o’clock
we broke up and went to repose in the boats under
the spread awnings. Just as we were selecting
the softest plank we could find for a bed, we had
an alarm which might have been attended with fatal
consequences. I omitted to mention that when we
rose to part and go into the boats, one of the party
threw a lighted brand out of the fire at the legs
of another; this compliment was returned, and as it
was thought very amusing, the object being to leap
up and let the brand pass between your legs, by degrees
all the party were engaged in it, even the rajah and
the natives joined in the sport, and were highly amused
with it, although with bare legs they stood a worse
chance of being hit than we did. At last the brands
were all expended and the fire extinct, and then,
as I said, we went away to sleep under the boats’
awnings. We were in the act of depositing our
loaded rifles by our sides in a place of security,
when the unearthly war cry rose in the jungle, and
in the stillness of the night these discordant screams
sounded like the yelling of a legion of devils.
Immediately afterwards a body of natives rushed from
the jungle in the direction of the boats, in which
we supposed that our European party were all assembled.
Always on our guard against treachery, and not knowing
but that these people might belong to a hostile band,
in an instant our rifles were in our hands and pointed
at the naked body of natives, who were now within
twenty yards of us. Mr. Hentig was on the point
of firing, when loud shouts of laughter from the Dyaks
arrested his hand, and we then perceived that Mr.
Brooke and others were with the natives, who enjoyed
the attempt to intimidate us. It was fortunate
that it ended as it did; for had Mr. Hentig been more
hasty, blood must have been shed in consequence of
this native practical joke. We joined the laugh,
however, laid down our rifles, then laid ourselves
down, and went fast asleep, having no further disturbance
than the still small voice of the mosquito, which,
like that of conscience, is one that “murders
sleep.”
The following morning we bade adieu
to our friendly hunting party, and I must not here
omit to mention a trait of honesty on the part of the
Dyaks. I had dropped my pocket handkerchief in
the walk of the day before, and in the evening it
was brought to me by one of the natives, who had followed
a considerable distance to bring it to me. It
must be known, that a coloured silk handkerchief is
to one of these poor Dyaks, who are very fond of finery,
an article of considerable value. He might have
retained it without any fear; and his bringing it to
me was not certainly with any hope of reward, as I
could have given him nothing which he would have prized
so much as the handkerchief itself. He was made
a present of it for his honesty.
We bade farewell to our friends at
Kuchin, and continued our survey on the coast.
The boats were now continually employed away from the
ship, which moved slowly to the westward. At
this time exposure and hard work brought the fever
into the ship. The barge returned in consequence
of four of her men being taken with it, and our sick
list increased daily. A few days afterwards the
coxswain of the barge died, and was buried along side
the same morning. This death, after so short an
illness, damped the spirits of the officers and men,
particularly of those who were ill. After this
burial we sailed for Sincapore. At this time our
sick report contained the names of more than thirty
men, with every probability of the number being increased;
but, thanks to God, from change of air, fresh provisions,
and a little relaxation from the constant fatigue,
the majority were in a short time convalescent.
On the 25th of September we arrived at Sincapore.
From the anchorage the town of Sincapore
has a very pleasing appearance. Most of the public
buildings, as well as some of the principal merchants’
houses, face the sea. The church is also close
to the beach, I presume to allow the congregation
the benefit of the sea breezes. It has no architectural
beauty to recommend it, being a plain building with
a spiral steeple, surmounted by a cross. The interior
is fitted up with more regard to neatness than elegance.
It has an organ, and is supplied with a host of young
choristers from the academy.
Between the beach and Government Hill
is a delightful upland, which is generally attended
by all the beauty and fashion of Sincapore in the
cool of the evening. A canal or small river divides
the town into two parts. On the western side
of it, stand all the stone houses of the merchants,
and it is here that all commercial business is transacted.
It is densely populated with Armenian Jews, Chinese,
and people from every part of India, each nation residing
in its own quarter, in the houses peculiar to and
characteristic of their country. Indeed, one of
the first things that strikes the stranger in Sincapore
is the variety of costume; Chinamen, Malays and Indians,
Armenians and Jews, all mingle together in every variety
of picturesque costume, giving you an idea of a carnival.
The palanquins resemble an omnibus on a small
scale, they are drawn on four wheels, have a door
on either side, and seats for four people. They
are very high, and drawn by one horse. The conductors,
however, are not perched up on high, but run by the
side of the horse, as do all the syces in India.
There are two hotels, the proprietors
of which are of course rivals. One is kept by
an Englishman, the other by a Frenchman; both are equally
attentive, but the Frenchman’s house has the
preference, in consequence of its superior locality,
facing the esplanade, and looking upon the sea.
The governor’s house is situated on the summit
of a hill, about a quarter of a mile from the beach.
From it you have a bird’s eye view of the whole
town, and also of the country in the interior for some
distance. From this eminence the town has a very
picturesque appearance; the houses on the east side
of the river (the May fair of Sincapore), are built
apart and surrounded by pretty gardens and lawns;
beyond this you have the roads and the sea studded
with every variety of vessels; and the island of Binting
rises from sea in the distance. The interior
is not without beauty: the eye ranges over a vast
expanse of grove and forest, interspersed with plantations
of nutmegs, cinnamon, cloves, and sugar canes, and
from which a most delightful perfume is brought by
the breeze, while here and there white houses may be
perceived, looking like mere specks in the dark foliage
by which they are surrounded. It is surprising,
when we reflect how short a space of time has passed
since this settlement was first made, how such a mass
of building and such a concourse of people can have
been collected.
It certainly does appear strange,
but it is no less true, that no nation can colonise
like the English, and I have often made that remark
in my wanderings and visitings of the various parts
of the globe. England fills the world and civilises
the world with her redundant population, and all her
colonies flourish, and remind you of a swarm of bees
which have just left the old hive and are busy in
providing for themselves. The Dutch colonies
are not what you can call thriving; they have not the
bustle, the enterprise, and activity which our colonies
possess. The Dutch have never conciliated the
natives, and obtained their goodwill; they have invariably
resorted to violence, and to a disregard of justice.
One would have thought that the French, from their
bonhomie, would have been one of the very best
nations to civilise, and certain to have succeeded;
but such is not the case. What can be the cause
of this, if it be not that, instead of raising the
character of the native population by good example
and strict justice, they demoralise by introducing
vices hitherto unknown to them, and alienate them by
injustice? There was an outcry raised at the French
taking possession of Taheite, as if any attempt on
their part to colonise was an infringement on our
right as Englishmen of universal colonisation.
I think if we were wise, we should raise no objection
to their colonising as much as they please. The
whole expence of founding the colony, raising the
fortifications, and building the towns, and, if I may
use the phrase, of settling every thing, may safely
be left to them. If a war breaks out, they will
have done a great deal of expensive work for our benefit,
as we are certain then to take possession. Algiers
has cost an enormous sum to France, and will cost
still more, and yet it can hardly be considered as
a colony. It is a military possession, an African
barrack, no more; and what will be the result in case
of the breaking out of hostilities? Their possession
of Algiers will be most advantageous to England, for
defend it they will with all their power. We,
with Gibraltar as a rendezvous, shall of course have
a most favourable position for assailing it, and the
consequence will be, that the whole focus of the war
will be drawn away from our own coasts, and the Mediterranean
will be the arena of all the fighting. The struggle
must be before the Pillars of Hercules. The more
we increase our fleets, the larger must her force
be, and she will have no squadron to spare to send
out to annoy our trade and colonial possessions.
But as this is a digression, and has nothing to do
with my narrative, I beg pardon and go on.
We found that the Dido had anchored
there before us, and had received her orders to proceed
to England. Oh! how we envied her good fortune;
and surely if envy is a base passion, in this instance
it becomes ennobled by the feelings of home and country
which excite it. The Dido left on the 10th, and
we regretted the loss of Captain Keppell most deeply.
Many merchant vessels had been lately wrecked on the
north coast of Borneo, and their crews made prisoners
by the pirate hordes. Some of the vessels had
had females on board, who had not been heard of since.
A letter from a master of a merchant vessel was received
by the authorities at Sincapore, wherein it was stated
on oath, that, having lately put into the port of
Ambong, in Borneo, an European woman had been seen
near one of the huts of the village; but that on their
approach, she disappeared. This account was corroborated
by the evidence of some Lascar seamen, who formed
a portion of the crew of the vessel. The contents
of this letter being forwarded by the authorities to
our gallant captain, he determined upon proceeding
to Ambong, accompanied by our old ally, the Phlegethon
steamer. Fortunately the town lay in our track,
as we were about to proceed to Labuan, and from thence
to Manilla. We again weighed anchor for Sarawak,
whither the steamer had already proceeded. On
our arrival at the mouth of the river we anchored,
and the captain went up in his gig. The following
day, to our great surprise, we received an intimation
that we might make a party of pleasure (a party quite
unknown in the Samarang), and go up to Kuchin.
We hurried away before the captain had time to repent
his indulgence, and set off, some seven or eight of
us, in the cutter, and pulled away as fast as we could,
till we were first out of hail, and then out of sight,
when we considered that we were safe.
I have already stated that the native
houses are built on the left side of the Sarawak river,
and those of the Europeans on the right. These
latter are pretty commodious little bungalows, built
of cedar and pine wood. At present there are
but three, belonging to Mr. Brooke, Mr. Williamson
the interpreter, and Hentig, a merchant who has lately
settled there. Ruppell, Mr. Brooke’s superintendent,
and Treecher, the surgeon, live in a large house on
the native side of the river. Each of these European
houses has its chatty bath adjoining to it, and this
luxury is indulged in at all hours of the day.
At nine o’clock a gong summons all the Europeans
to the breakfast table of Mr. Brooke. When breakfast
is over, they all separate, either to follow business
or pleasure, and seldom meet again till six in the
evening, when dinner is served, and the time is passed
away till all retire to bed.
Let me describe the view from the
front of Mr. Brooke’s house: The
schooner lying half way across the river is the Julia,
belonging to Mr. Brooke: she sails every month
for Sincapore, laden with antimony ore; and thus,
at the same time, she forms a mail-packet between Sincapore
and Kuchin. The large open building, with a wharf,
leading down to the river, is the store in which the
antimony is sifted, smelted, and weighed. On
the point near the bend of the river is the fort.
It is a strong building of large timbers, and mounts
eight 24-lb. iron guns, in very excellent condition.
This is a very necessary defence, as the European
rajah has many enemies. The building whose top
just appears above the trees is the Chinese joss-house,
or temple; for there are many Chinese settlers at
Kuchin, who are very useful in their capacities of
carpenters, blacksmiths, and agriculturists. Sweeping
with the eye a range of dwelling houses built on stakes,
you stop at one of tolerable proportions, which has
a platform in front of it, on which are mounted about
twenty small guns, and there is a flag-staff, on which
is hoisted a red and yellow flag: that is the
palace of Rajah Muda Hassan. Take a canoe, and
cross over to it. You will find Muda sitting cross-legged
in the centre of it: he shakes hands with you,
and offers you cigars and tea. You will also
meet his brother, Bud-ruddeen. You take your leave
of the rajah, and amuse yourself with a walk round
the town, during which you examine the natives and
their wives, their customs, their houses, and their
gardens.
With the exception of the more civilised
tribes in the vicinity of the Sarawak, the Malays
who inhabit the coast of Borneo are a cruel, treacherous,
and disgusting race of men, with scarcely one good
quality to recommend them. The numerous tribes
of these people are separately governed, either by
a rajah or petty sultan. Their laws are much more
respected than would be supposed in a country where
every man is armed, and is a robber by profession.
The dress of the Malay is very uniform, consisting
of a loose jacket, a sash, and trousers: in some
parts a cloth is worn round the head; in others, a
hat, made of leaves or rattan. Their arms are
the kris and spear; occasionally they carry the sum-pi-tan,
and poisoned arrows. Their houses are built upon
stakes, probably for the sake of cleanliness; as the
flooring consists of a kind of grating made of rattan,
all dirt falls through. The houses are small,
and contain but one family, and, like those of the
Dyaks, are built of the lightest materials. The
Malays pretend to Mahomedanism, and there is generally
a large empty building in every town which is dignified
with the name of a mosque: on the outside are
hung drums or tom-toms, of huge dimensions, which
are used as gentle reminders of the hours of prayer.
I have already stated that these Malay
tribes live almost wholly by piracy, to carry on which
each town possesses several large prahus, which they
man, and send out to intercept any unfortunate junk
or other vessel incapable of much resistance, which
fate or the currents may have driven too near their
coast. When the vessels are captured the cargoes
are deposited in their warehouses, the vessels are
broken up, and the crews are retained as slaves, to
dig yams or pound paddy. Unless they are irritated
by a desperate resistance, or they attack an inimical
tribe, they do not shed blood, as has generally been
supposed; restrained, however, by no other feeling
than that of avarice, for the slaves are too valuable
to be destroyed. In their physiognomy these Malays
are inferior to the Dyaks: they have a strong
resemblance to the monkey in face, with an air of
low cunning and rascality most unprepossessing.
In stature they are very low, and generally bandy-legged.
Their hair and eyes are invariably black, but the face
is, in most cases, devoid of hair; when it does grow,
it is only at the extreme point of the chin.
The Borneo Malay women are as plain as the men, although
at Sincapore, Mauritius, and the Sooloos, they are
well favoured; and they wind their serang, or robe,
so tight round their bodies, that they walk in a very
constrained and ungainly fashion. Many of these
tribes are intermixed with the natives of the Celebes,
such as the inhabitants of Sooloo.
The Malays deal with criminals in
a very summary manner, the knowledge of which prevents
many crimes among this semi-barbarous people.
Robbers, for the first offence, lose their right hand;
for the second they undergo the penalty of death.
When we were at Kuchin a Chinaman was convicted of
selling sam-schoo without permission: his goods
were confiscated for a time, to be redeemed only by
his good behaviour. I am not acquainted with
their punishments for minor offences, except in the
above instance; but I believe it is generally by fine.
Every rajah holds despotic sway over the inhabitants
of his province, and punishes as he thinks proper,
without reference to any tribunal, even in cases where
the sentence is death. The method of executing
criminals with the kris is as follows: He
is made to sit down in a chair, with his arms extended
horizontally, and held in that position by two men.
The executioner, who stands behind him, inserts his
kris above the collar-bone, in a perpendicular manner,
which causes instant death, as the weapon enters the
heart.
The following anecdote, related to
me by some of the Roche people, may amuse the reader: A
celebrated Malay pirate, whose sanguinary deeds had
filled the Archipelago with terror, became violently
enamoured with one of the slaves of a rajah living
on the river Sarawak. After vainly endeavouring
to obtain her from her master by offers of money and
entreaties, he lay in wait for her, and ran away with
her into the jungle.
He had hardly passed his honeymoon
before the rajah discovered his retreat, and he sent
to the Malay to inform him, that, if he would make
his appearance at the audience upon a certain day,
he should have justice done him.
The Malay chief, who was a man of
undaunted courage, and who felt confident that the
reputation he had acquired by his piratical exploits
was alone sufficient to awe his enemies, consented
to appear, hoping that arrangements might be made
which would permit him to leave the jungle, and allow
him to enjoy his new bride in quiet.
On the day appointed he appeared before
the council, armed, and accompanied by his brother,
both resting their hands upon the handles of their
krisses, a movement which among the Malays proclaims
no feelings of amity. In this attitude of preparation
they walked into the audience room, which was crowded
with a host of enemies. The council decided,
that if on a certain day he would produce a specified
sum of money the girl should be his, and he should
return unmolested. The sum named was exorbitant,
but the Malay chief agreed to the payment, and was
permitted to depart.
When the day of payment arrived, the
council sat as before, and the Malay chief again made
his appearance; but this time he came alone, his brother
being absent on a piratical expedition. He had,
in consequence of his violent affection for the girl,
made every attempt to raise the stipulated sum, but
could not succeed. He brought all that he could
collect, but it fell far short of the sum which had
been agreed upon, and he requested time to procure
the remainder. The council consulted a while,
and then stipulated, that the chief, not having brought
the sum agreed upon, should leave his kris as a pledge
till the rest should be forthcoming. The kris
that the chief wore was itself of great value, very
handsomely ornamented with precious stones. It
had belonged to his ancestors, and was, as they always
are, highly prized, and they knew that it would, if
possible, be reclaimed. The chief was most reluctant
to part with it, but his love for his mistress overcame
his scruples, and also his prudence, for it left him
unarmed amidst his implacable enemies. He pulled
out his kris, and laid it on the table upon the money,
and was busy disengaging the sheath to add to it, when,
by a signal from the rajah, he was seized from behind.
He started up, but it was too late; his trusty weapon,
which had so often stood by him in his need, was no
longer within his reach, and he was in a moment transfixed
with a dozen blades, falling a victim to his love of
the girl and the treachery of his foes.
After passing two very pleasant days
at Kuchin, we prepared to descend the river.
I have omitted to say that Mr. Treecher, the surgeon,
was fond of natural history, and possessed a very
tolerable collection of birds, and other animals indigenous
to the country. I was shown several skeletons
of the orang outang, some of which were of great size.
There is no want of these animals in the jungle, but
a living specimen is not easy to procure; I saw but
one, an adult female, belonging to Mr. Brooke.
It was very gentle in its manners, and, when standing
upright, might have measured three feet six inches.
On board of the Phlegethon there were
two specimens of the wa-wa, or long-armed ape, which
had been presented to Mr. Brooke by one of the neighbouring
rajahs, and they are by the natives considered very
valuable. Their affection when domesticated is
remarkable; their first act when they meet one they
know is to leap upon your breast and embrace you with
their arms, just like a child will its mother, and
they will remain, if permitted, in this position for
hours, and complain if removed. Their cry is
very plaintive, and, heard at night in the jungle,
sounds like that of a female in distress. I was
given to understand that in the presents made by chiefs,
a scarce variety of monkey is often the principal
gift, and most esteemed.
The scarcest monkey in Borneo is the
proboscis, or long-nosed. I saw but two specimens
of this animal, one a female, with the nose very long,
and pendulous at the extremity; the other a male,
very young, and with the nose more or less prominent,
and giving its face a more actual resemblance to that
of a man’s than I had ever before seen.
This monkey has never, I believe, been brought to
England alive. The British Museum has a stuffed
specimen. It is not so mischievous in its habits
as the tribe in general.
As Rajah Muda Hassan has been so frequently
mentioned, it may be as well to give a succinct outline
of his history. At the death of the late sultan,
Muda Hassan was the heir-apparent to the throne, but
he resigned in favour of his nephew, retaining the
office of prime minister, which office he had held
during the former reign, not only to the satisfaction
of the sultan, but also of the people, with whom he
was deservedly a great favourite. His influence,
being even greater than that of the sultan, occasioned
a jealous feeling, and a contention of party, which
induced Muda Hassan to retire to Sarawak with his wives
and personal attendants. He was succeeded in
his office of prime minister by an Arab, Pangeran
Usop, a man of unbounded ambition, who by his harsh
and tyrannical conduct soon became hated by the Brunese,
who longed for the return of Muda Hassan, under whose
sway they had been quiet and happy. Pangeran
Usop, aware of the popular feeling, now considered
Muda Hassan as his enemy, and took every opportunity
of vilifying and creating suspicion of Muda Hassan
on the mind of the sultan, who was little better than
an idiot. He asserted that Muda Hassan and his
brother Bud-ruddeen were leagued with the English,
and were their only supporters in their pretensions
to the isle of Labuan, and that they would assist
the English in taking possession of Borneo.
These reports, although at first treated
with disdain, continually repeated had their effect,
not only upon the sultan, but upon the people; and
Muda Hassan, who was informed of what had been going
on, and had not deigned to notice it, now considered
that it was advisable to repair to Borneo, and refute
the charges brought against him.
When Mr. Brooke purchased the rajahship
and mines of Sarawak, he agreed to compensate Muda
with a life annuity of two or three hundred per annum,
and give him a passage to his native city, Bruni, whenever
he should feel disposed to leave Kuchin. Some
time had now elapsed since the signing of the contract,
during which Muda had remained at his palace at Kuchin,
enjoying his income, and living on the very best terms
with the Europeans. He now, however, expressed
a wish to return to Bruni, and as it was Mr. Brooke’s
intention to proceed to that port in the Samarang,
it was proposed that the Phlegethon steamer should
embark Muda and his suite, and that on our arrival
at Bruni we should see this rajah and his brother
Bud-ruddeen installed in their positions which by
their birth they were entitled to. Another object
was in view, and expected to be gained by this step.
Up to the present, no efforts had been made by the
Bornean government to discountenance piracy; on the
contrary, the plunder of the pirates was brought in
and openly disposed of at Bruni, which is the royal
residence. Muda and his brother Bud-ruddeen were
stanch friends to the English, and it was anticipated
that by their being appointed to offices of power,
and forcing the sultan to a treaty to put down piracy,
and pay respect to the English flag, a very important
advance would be made towards the extermination of
these marauders, and commerce, once rendered secure,
and property respected, Borneo would soon be brought
to a state of comparative civilisation.
As soon as the two rajahs, with all
their wives and suite, &c., could be got on board
of the Phlegethon, Mr. Brooke, and Mr. Williamson the
interpreter, came on board the Samarang, and we sailed.
On our arrival at the island of Labuan, we anchored
the ship, and despatched the steamer, with her cargo,
up to Bruni. The captain of the Samarang and
one or two officers proceeded up to Bruni in the barge
on the following day; and I was the midshipman in
charge of the boat. We did not arrive at the
city till 8 o’clock in the evening; and it was
too dark to distinguish the houses. With some
difficulty, we discovered the steamer, which was anchored
on the main street. We pulled alongside, and landing
the captain and Kuchinians, Adams, the surgeon of the
party, and I, found ourselves in undisturbed possession
of the barge.
Bruni is called by Crawfurd the Venice
of the East; and he is so far correct, that it is
built in the same peculiar way, and is a most extraordinary
town. It is built almost entirely on the water.
It is of great size, containing from thirty to forty
thousand inhabitants, most of whom are Malays, but
who, from having so long intermixed with the tribes
on the coast, now style themselves Brunese, after the
town. This town, which is situated where the
river forms a wide and shallow estuary, is built with
little regard to regularity. There are, however,
two large main streets, intersecting each other in
the form of an irregular cross. These divide
the town into four parts, one of which is partly built
upon terra firma, while the other three portions
are composed of massive wooden houses, built on piles,
and just sufficiently separated here and there to
admit of the passage of a canoe. On the portion
which is on dry land is built the sultan’s palace,
a church or mosque, and most of the more prominent
buildings. It was in the main street (if such
a term may be used), and as near as possible in the
centre of the town, that the steamer was anchored.
When we awoke and roused up it was
broad daylight, and the scene was most novel:
surrounding the steamer and the barge, and extending
many yards from them, lay hundreds of canoes, filled
with natives of every tribe to be found on the coast,
and dressed in every variety of costume. From
the wild Dusum to the civilised Arab and Malay rajah,
natives in every posture, and decked in every colour,
impelled by curiosity, were crowded around us.
Here was a chief, dressed in an embroidered jacket,
sitting cross-legged, and shading himself with a yellow
silk umbrella. There were some wild-looking Dyaks,
with scarcely as much covering as decency demanded,
standing up on their narrow canoes, one hand resting
on the handle of their knives, the other on their hips,
eying us from under their long matted hair with glances
that told of no good feeling towards us. In another
quarter were women, in a covered boat, whose jealous
lattices only permitted us a glimpse of sparkling eyes,
and of the yellow array which proclaimed them as some
of the royal favourites. As far as you could
see on all sides there was a confused mass, composed
of embroidered chiefs, black-eyed women, grey-bearded
Arabs, spears, shields, paddles and umbrellas.
Taking out my sketch-book, I amused myself with drawing
the various costumes no very easy task,
as the canoes were continually on the move; and before
I could well catch the head and shoulders of a native,
when I raised my eyes from the paper he had often
disappeared in the crowd, and I found another party
and another costume in his place.
Rajah Muda Hassan had already landed,
and 10 o’clock had been fixed upon as the hour
for a full-dress visit to the sultan. As the time
approached, Mr. Brooke, with our captain and the officers
composing the party, came into the barge, and were
pulled up to the sultan’s audience chamber.
This was a large three-sided building, facing the water,
with a platform in front, on which were mounted five
or six leilas, or native guns. The roof
was slightly carved, and the gables ornamented with
large wooden rams’ horns. The red and yellow
flag of Borneo waved above it.
We were received at the platform by
a numerous party of chiefs, handsomely dressed in
silks, satins, and gold embroidery. They
ushered us into the audience chamber, the walls of
which were lined with a sort of cloth, and ornamented
with shields. The floor was matted. The chamber
was filled with natives, all well dressed and armed.
They sat cross-legged, preserving a respectful silence.
A vacant aisle was preserved between them leading
to the throne, which was at the upper end of the chamber.
The throne was a frame of painted wood, gilt and carved,
and bearing a very suspicious resemblance to a Chinese
bedstead. On this, sitting cross-legged, was
the sultan of Borneo, to whom we were all separately
presented as English warriors, &c. &c. Chairs
were then placed in a half circle in front of the
sultan, and we seated ourselves. The sultan,
a man of about sixty years of age, is said to be very
imbecile, and under the control of his ministers, who
do with him as they please. He was dressed in
a loose jacket and trousers of purple satin, richly
embroidered with gold, a close-fitting vest of gold
cloth, and a light cloth turban on his head.
In his sash he wore a gold-headed kris of exquisite
workmanship. His head was bald, and his features
wore a continual air of suspicion, mixed with simplicity.
The first is not to be wondered at, as he lives in
the happy expectation of being poisoned every day.
He has two thumbs on the right hand, and makes the
supernumerary one useful by employing it in charging
his mouth with the beetle-nut and chunan, in which
luxury he indulges to excess. Immediately below
him were his two body attendants, who have charge of
his beetle-nut box and his weapons. In front of
the throne, and inside the half aisle formed by the
Europeans, Seraib Yussef, the prime minister, Muda
Hassan, and Bud-ruddeen, were seated on their hams.
On each side and below the throne were hundreds of
attendants or guards; those in the front row sitting
cross-legged, with drawn krisses; those behind them
standing with long spears, tipped with bunches of red
horsehair, in their hands. The remainder of the
chamber was occupied by chiefs, all of them armed.
The communications and demands we had to make were carried on through Mr.
Williamson, the interpreter. The speakers were Mr. Brooke, our captain,
the sultans prime minister, Muda and Bud-ruddeen, the sultan occasionally
nodding his head in approval of replies made by his prime minister. The
whole of the conversation was carried on in so low a tone as not to be heard
except by those sitting nearest to the throne. The subject of it was,
however, no secret; and it was as follows:
Near to the mouth of the river, is
an island called Pulo Cheremon, on which the sultan
has built some forts. On our entering the river,
one of our boats had been fired at from one of these
forts, although the English flag was hoisted at the
time. The demands made in this conference were,
that the proper respect should be paid to the English
flag, that the forts upon Pulo Cheremon should be dismantled,
and that the sultan should reinstate Muda and Bud-ruddeen
in offices becoming their rank. Now, that the
first demand was reasonable must be admitted; but
what right we had to insist upon the forts being destroyed,
and the sultan’s uncles put into office, I really
cannot pretend to say.
Seraib Yussef, who was inimical to
the English, expressed his disapprobation of their
demands in very strong terms: as for the sultan,
he had very little to say. As it appeared that
there was no chance of our demands being complied
with without coercion, the conference was broken up
by our principals pointing to the steamer, which lay
within pistol-shot of the palace, and reminding the
sultan and the ministers that a few broadsides would
destroy the town. Having made this observation,
we all rose to take our departure, stating that we
would wait for an answer to our demands upon the following
day. Our situation was rather critical, only
eight Europeans among hundreds of armed natives taking
their sultan in this manner by the beard, when, at
a signal from him, we might have all been despatched
in a moment. More than one chief had his hand
upon his kris as we stalked through a passage left
for us out of the audience chamber; but whatever may
have been their wishes, they did not venture further
without authority. On reaching the platform outside,
a very strange sight presented itself. With the
exception of a lane left for our passage to the boat,
the whole space was covered with naked savages.
These were the Maruts, a tribe of Dyaks who live in
the mountains. The word marut signifies brave.
These naked gentlemen, who are very partial to the
sultan, had come down from the mountains to render
assistance in case of hostility on our part.
They were splendidly framed men, but very plain in
person, with the long matted hair falling over their
shoulders. They were armed with long knives and
shields, which they brandished in a very warlike manner,
occasionally giving a loud yell. They certainly
appeared very anxious to begin work; and I fully expected
we should have had to draw and defend ourselves.
I was not sorry, therefore, when I found myself once
more in the stern sheets of the barge, with our brass
six-pounder loaded with grape, pointed towards them.
The poor fellows little knew the effect of a shower
of grape-shot, or they would not have been so anxious
for a “turn-up.”
The sultan had offered a house for
the accommodation of the Europeans during our stay
at Bruni. It was a small wooden building over
the water and resting upon piles. It communicated
by a platform with the Mahomedan mosque, which was
built of brick and of tolerable dimensions. The
interior of this mosque had no other furniture in it
except a sort of pulpit painted, which stood in the
centre. Outside on a raised platform was a very
large tom-tom or drum, upon which a native played from
morning to night, much to our annoyance, as it was
so close to us. Religious worship appears at
a very low ebb at Bruni, for during the whole time
that we remained there I did not see one person enter
the mosque.
At the back of the mosque there was
a piece of green sward, which separated us from the
royal buildings. Passing through the mosque we
strolled over this piece of pasture, when, close to
the water’s edge, we discovered several fine
old brass 32-pounders, dismounted and half-buried
in the swamp. On inspection we found them to be
Spanish, bearing the inscription of Carolus Tertius,
Rex Hispaniorum, with the arms of Castile above.
How they came into the sultan’s possession we
could not find out. He was said to value them
exceedingly; if so, he did not show it by the neglect
paid to them.
Bruni on a calm day presents a novel
and pretty appearance. The masses of houses appear
to float on the water, and the uniformity is broken
by gay flags and banners, which indicate the rank
and the office of them who hoist them. The large
square sails of the prahus, the variety of boats and
canoes, the floating bazaar, and the numerous costumes
continually in moving panorama before you, all combine
to form a very admirable picture. Add to this
the chiming and beating of gongs and tom-toms in every
cadence, and from every quarter, and you are somewhat
reminded of an Asiatic Bartholomew fair.
The right-hand side of the river,
which is opposite to the town, consists of a series
of small hills, which are partially cleared, but present
little appearance of cultivation. Here we were
shown a specimen of the upas tree: it was growing
close to a small stone fountain in the vicinity of
some straggling huts. It was a solitary tree,
tall and red-stemmed, with the foliage branching out
in a canopy at the top.
So much has been said for and against
this tree, usually supposed to be fabulous, that we
looked upon it with great curiosity; and although
aware that its noxious qualities have been much exaggerated,
we were anxious to test its powers, if we could.
We procured a ladder, which we raised against the
tree, and one of our party ascended to the uppermost
branches without experiencing the fainting sensation
ascribed to be produced by close contact with its
foliage. We then tapped the tree at the bottom,
and there issued from it a white viscous fluid, which
the natives asserted to be a virulent poison, and
used by them for dipping the points of their arrows.
We carried off a bottle of this poison, and having
drunk from the fountain beneath the tree, without fear
and without injury, we went away. This was the
only specimen of the upas tree that I saw in Borneo.
The lower orders at Bruni, in addition to a jacket
and trousers, wear an immense straw hat of a conical
shape, with a brim as wide as an umbrella. This
hat, unless thrown back on the shoulders, entirely
conceals the face. At times, when the river is
crowded with canoes, nothing is to be seen but a mass
of these straw hats, which present a very strange
appearance. But the greatest novelty at Bruni
is the floating bazaar. There are no shops in
the city, and the market is held every day in canoes.
These come in at sunrise every morning from every
part of the river, laden with fresh fruit, tobacco,
pepper, and every other article which is produced in
the vicinity; a few European productions, such as
handkerchiefs, check-cotton prints, &c., also make
their appearance. Congregated in the main street
the canoes are tacked together, forming lanes through
which the purchasers, in their own canoes, paddle,
selecting and bargaining for their goods with as much
convenience as if the whole was transacted on terra
firma. Iron is here so valuable that it
is used as money. One hundred flat pieces an
inch square are valued at a dollar, and among the lower
classes these iron pieces form the sole coin.
They are unstamped, so that every person appears to
be at liberty to cut his own iron into money; but whether
such is really the case I cannot vouch.
We remained at Bruni for a week, during
which time a great deal of diplomatic duty was got
through by the seniors of the party, leaving the juniors
to amuse themselves with discovering fresh objects
of interest, and illustrating every thing worthy of
notice.
Our whole party met every evening
at the small house which had been appropriated for
our use by the sultan. It staggered fearfully
upon its wooden legs under our accumulated weight,
and we constantly expected that we should be let down
into the water. Here we dined and passed the
evening in conversation, with our arms all ready at
hand, guns and pistols loaded, and the boats anchored
close along side of us, in case of any treachery.
Every day an interview was had with the sultan, but
no definite answer had been obtained to our demands.
On the 6th, however, it was resolved by our diplomatists
that no more time should be wasted in useless discussion,
but that the sultan must be at once brought to terms;
indeed, our own safety demanded it, for the popular
feeling was so much excited, and the people were so
indignant at our attempt to coerce their sultan, that
we were in hourly expectation of an attack.
At seven in the evening the party
repaired to the audience chamber, leaving their arms
behind them, for they felt that any effort from five
Europeans to defend themselves against so many hundreds,
would be unavailing, and that more would be gained
by a show of indifference. They landed at the
platform, and the barge, in which were Lieutenant
Baugh (since dead) and myself, was ordered to lie on
her oars abreast of the audience chamber, and to keep
her 6-pounder, in which there was a fearful dose of
grape and canister, pointed at the sultan himself during
the whole of the interview.
It was an anxious time: the audience
chamber was filled with hundreds of armed men, in
the midst of whom were five Europeans dictating to
their sultan. The platform outside was crowded
with the wild and fearless Maruts: not a native
in the city but was armed to the teeth, and anxious
for the fray.
We, on our parts, were well prepared
for fearful vengeance; the barge was so placed that
the assassination of Mr. Brooke and the Europeans
would have been revenged on the first discharge of
our gun by the slaughter of hundreds; and in the main
street lay the steamer, with a spring on her cable,
her half ports up, and guns loaded to the muzzle,
awaiting, as by instruction, for the discharge of the
gun from the barge, to follow up the work of death.
The platform admitted one of the steamer’s guns
to look into the audience chamber, the muzzle was pointed
direct at the sultan, a man held the lighted tow in
his hand. Every European on board had his musket
ready loaded, and matters assumed a serious appearance.
From where I was on the barge, all
appeared hushed in the audience room. I could
see the prime minister, Muda, and Bud-ruddeen, as they
rose in turns to speak. I could perceive by the
motion of their lips that they were talking, but not
a sound came to our ears. This state of things
lasted about half an hour, and then there was a slight
stir, and Mr. Brooke and his party marched towards
us through the crowd of warriors.
By dint of threats he had gained his
point. The sultan had signed a treaty by which
he bound himself to respect the British flag, to make
over to us the island of Labuan, to destroy the forts
on Pulo-Cheremon, to discountenance piracy, and to
instal Muda and Bud-ruddeen into offices becoming
their birth and high rank.
I have since heard Mr. Brooke remark,
that considering the natives were well aware that
our guns were directed against them, the self-possession
and coolness shared by every one of them were worthy
of admiration. They never showed the slightest
emotion, their speeches were free from gesticulation,
and even their threats were conveyed in a quiet subdued
tone; and every thing was carried on with all the calmness
and deliberation that might be expected at a cabinet
council at St. James’s.
Whilst at Bruni, we picked up several
specimens of coal, and asking one of the chiefs if
much could be procured, he showed us a few sacks.
Ignorant of its value, he was still cunning enough
to perceive how much interest Ave felt in the discovery,
and immediately asked a most tremendous price for
his stock. One would really have thought that
we were bargaining for precious stones; at all events
he must have had an intuitive idea that we considered
them as “black diamonds.” On the other
hand, an old Arab at Bruni, who had supplied us with
one or two live bullocks, when he saw the Samarang
at anchor at the mouth of the river, had the modesty
to offer our captain 400 dollars for her, less than
100l. sterling. Sell dear and buy cheap is the
way to get rich, and proves how fit for commerce are
all the people of the archipelago.
While we were lying at Bruni in the
barge, one day, when Adams the assistant-surgeon and
myself were sole occupants, we were surprised at the
appearance of a handsomely dressed Malay youth, who
stepped into the boat, greeting us, although strangers,
sans ceremonie. Always wishing to study
native character, we amused him as well as we could,
and on his departure gave him to understand that he
might come whenever he pleased. About dark we
were surprised by a canoe coming under our stern, and
the occupant throwing into the barge several fine
fowls and a large basket of fruit. We could not
imagine to whom we were indebted for this civility,
but suspected our Malay friend, and when he came again
we taxed him with it, and he acknowledged it.
On this visit he sat in the boat for some time, appearing
to take a great interest in every thing connected
with us, and observed that we were bargaining with
the natives in the canoes alongside of us for the
various arms of the country, which they are content
to sell provided they obtain a most exorbitant price.
Our Malay friend went off in his canoe, and in the
course of an hour returned with a large collection
of shields, spears, krisses, and mats, which he begged
our acceptance of. Every day did he bring us presents
of some description or another, refusing to take any
thing in return, except perhaps an English pocket
handkerchief or something of very trifling value.
Suddenly his visits were discontinued, and we saw no
more of him. One day, dining at the house lent
us by the sultan, Mr. Brooke was talking with some
of our party of a young Malay chief, who, being mad,
had attempted to kill his wife, and had in consequence
been placed in durance, but had since been liberated.
Mr. Brooke wishing to speak to him, sent for him,
and on his appearance this madman proved to be our
generous unknown.
The day after the signing of the treaty
we left Bruni, the steamer taking the barge in tow,
and the same afternoon we joined the Samarang at our
newly-acquired possession, the isle of Labuan.
This island is about thirty miles in circumference,
flat, and covered with thick jungle. It has no
inhabitants. Its anchorage is good, being protected
by the main and two smaller islands. The embouchure
of a rivulet forms a small bay, which we dignified
with the title of Victoria. We found water plentiful,
and several specimens of coal.
From Labuan we proceeded to Ambong,
a place where it was supposed that an European female
had been detained as a slave. Ambong is a pretty
little bay, with a Malay village built in the bight
of it, and there is a fine view of Keeney Balloo,
the great mountain of Borneo, in the back-ground.
This mountain, estimated to be 14,000 feet high, is
about forty miles from Ambong, and with the aid of
a glass we could discern cataracts and ravines innumerable.
It is certainly a most splendid affair, on one side
rising almost perpendicularly, and in appearance nearly
flat at the top. At sunset, from the bay, its
appearance was splendid. We found nothing at
Ambong to lead us to suppose that European females
had at any time been made prisoners by the inhabitants:
they were apparently a quiet, peaceable people, living
entirely by agriculture. Their close neighbours,
however, the Moros of Tampassook, are a notorious
tribe of the Illanoan pirates, who are the terror of
the Asiatic seas. It was not improbable that
these people might have many European prisoners as
their slaves, but from what we knew of their character,
we felt assured that if they possessed white female
prisoners, they would never consent to their being
ransomed.
After making a survey of Ambong, we
only waited to take in a supply of fresh beef, and
then started the Phlegethon on her return to Sarawak
with Mr. Brooke and Mr. Williamson, while we shaped
our course in an opposite direction on our way to
Manilla.
I may here remark that the bullocks
at Ambong were remarkably fine and the price of them
ridiculously cheap. Two of the largest were to
be purchased for about twenty-five shillings worth
of calico or any other European manufacture.
Wherever we went on this island, and I may say over
the Indian archipelago generally, the spirit of trade
and barter appeared to be universal; and if the inhabitants
of Borneo were inclined to look into the riches of
their island, and with them procure English manufactures,
which when piracy is abolished they will do, the commercial
opening to this country will be great indeed.
The scenery in the bay of Ambong varies from that
of the Borneo coast in general. The bay is backed
by a series of small hills, cleared away and partially
cultivated, instead of the low jungle which is elsewhere
so universal.
On our way to Manilla we touched at
the entrance of a river up which is situated the town
of Tampassook. Bodies of armed men came down in
haste to oppose our landing, which we did with a view
of taking sights to verify the chronometers.
We came to a parley before we came to blows, and the
captain drew a line close to the beach, telling the
Illanoans that his men would remain inside of it,
on condition that they would remain outside.
This arrangement was agreed to, and the observations
were taken between four or five hundred armed warriors
on one side, and four boats with the guns ready to
fire on the other.
The pirates were all very well dressed
in stuffs and cloths: they carried shields so
large as to cover the whole body, and long heavy swords
with the handles ornamented with balls and human hair.
Many were on horseback, and formed a very respectable
irregular cavalry, wearing a light loose dress, and
armed with long spears and short round shields.
One costume was quite novel, being a coat of armour
made of buffalo leather scaled with oyster shells.
Both parties adhered to the agreement, and all therefore
passed off quietly; the observations were completed,
and we returned to the ship.
Tampassook, it is asserted, would
be a grand place for booty if it was stormed, as the
inhabitants possess a great deal of money and diamonds.
They are, however, a very brave people, and would not
part with their riches without a terrible resistance.
While off this river we had notice
given us that there was a fleet of 100 piratical prahus
lying off the island of Balabac. We shaped our
course thither, hoping to surprise them, but we were
disappointed: the birds had flown, and the bay
of Balabac was untenanted. We cruised for a week
among the islands in search of them, but could not
discover their retreat; so we shaped our course for
Manilla, taking the passage to the eastward of Palawan,
which was considered the best at this season of the
year.
While off the north-east coast of
Palawan, our boats left to survey discovered an Illanoan
prahu at anchor off one of the small islands that
surround the coast. The boats gave chase, and
the pirates used every exertion to get away.
The gig soon headed the other boats, but gained very
slowly on the pirate, and her muskets caused no apparent
execution, but one of the cutters with the grape from
her gun killed several of their fighting men, who
stood on the roof brandishing their krisses, and fearlessly
exposing themselves to the fire. On turning a
point the prahu kept before the wind, and walked away
from us so fast that we gave up the chase.
In about a fortnight afterwards, the
Corregidor, a small island at the mouth of Manilla
Bay, hove in sight. On our arriving abreast of
it, a gun-boat came out to board us, and inquire after
our bill of health; but as we had a spanking breeze,
and men-of-war do not heave-to to be boarded, the
gun-boat returned to the island as wise as she came
out. Manilla Bay is of immense size, being thirty
miles deep, and twenty wide. Near the mouth of
the Bay the land is high, but at the head, where the
city of Manilla is built, it is remarkably low and
flat. As we had the wind in our teeth, and Manilla
was twenty-five miles distant, we did not arrive there
till sunset. After shaving the sterns of several
merchant ships, who would have been better pleased
if we had given them a wider berth, we at last dropped
anchor about two miles from the town.
Manilla, from the anchorage, has not
an inviting appearance. I have said that the
land upon which it is built is very low, and as the
town is strongly fortified, nothing is to be seen
from the shipping but a long line of sea wall, with
the roofs of the largest buildings, and a mass of
brick, which we were told was the cathedral, overtopping
it. At one end of this sea wall is the canal,
or river, flanked on one side by a mole, and on the
other by a light-house.
Manilla is, however, a very delightful
place; and to us, who had been so many months among
savages, it appeared a Paradise. The canal I have
alluded to divides the fortified city from the suburban
towns of San Fernando, San Gabriel, and others, in
which are situated all the commercial houses, stores,
godowns, dock-yards, and saw mills. All the Chinese
and lower orders also reside in these suburbs, and
I may add that all the amusements, feasts, &c., are
carried on in this quarter. The city of Manilla
within the fortifications is a very quiet, clean,
and well-regulated town, inhabited entirely by the
higher orders: the streets are well laid out,
the houses regular, and built of white freestone.
In the centre of the city is the Plaza, on one side
of which is the cathedral, and opposite it the governor’s
palace; both very insignificant buildings. The
cathedral, which is very ancient, is devoid of all
attempt at architecture, and resembles a huge barn;
while the governor’s palace, in appearance,
reminds you of a stable.
During the day the streets of Manilla
are perfectly quiet and deserted. At dusk the
people begin to move, and show signs of life.
The sallyport gates are closed at eleven o’clock
at night, after which hour there is neither ingress
or egress, and on this point they are most absurdly
particular.
The natives of Luzon are much below
the middle size. The men are slightly made, weak,
and inoffensive; the women, on the contrary, are remarkable
for their pretty faces, feet, and figures, set off
by a dress of the most picturesque description:
a short petticoat, of gaily-coloured silk or cotton,
and a boddice of similar material, of sufficient height
to cover the bosom, is their usual costume. Their
long jet black hair is allowed to fall in tresses
down their backs. Many have a kerchief tastefully
thrown over their heads; and they wear little velvet
slippers, embroidered with gold and silver thread.
Their appearance is extremely captivating to foreigners,
who do not in a hurry forget their graceful mien and
the arch glances from their brilliant eyes. Manilla
supports a considerable body of infantry and cavalry,
the whole composed of natives of the island.
Their horses are small, as well as the men, and are
not well trained; but the object of the Spaniards is
to make a show to intimidate the Indians, who, having
no discipline whatever, are, of course, inferior even
to these very moderate troops. Not long ago,
one of the strongest forts was taken possession of
by a party of rebels, assisted by some soldiers who
had revolted: the fort was recaptured, and, as
an example, a dreadful slaughter ensued. The
parade ground, outside the citadel, was the scene of
carnage. A large pit was dug, at the brink of
which the victims were placed; they were then shot,
and thrown into this grave. Eighty-two were thus
butchered, and buried in the pit, over which a mound
has been raised, to commemorate their execution.
Outside the town, and half encircling
it, there is a splendid esplanade, between an avenue
of trees. This leads to the water, when the road
runs parallel with it for nearly a mile, terminating
at one of the piers of the canal. This is known
by the, I presume, correct name of Scandal Point.
A number of carriages, filled with all the elite
of Manilla, turn out on this drive a little before
sunset, and the scene is very gay and exciting.
I leave the reader to conceive upwards of 200 carriages
passing and repassing, besides equestrians and pedestrians.
The reader may say that it must be like the ring at
Hyde Park; but it is more brilliant, although not
in such good taste; and then it is the beauty of the
climate the contrast between the foliage
and the blue ocean which gives the effect.
No buttoning up to an east wind, nor running away
from a shower; but ever gay, and fresh, and exhilarating.
Here you meet the old Don, enjoying his quiet stroll
and cigar, all alone. Soldier officers, in plain
dress and long mustachoes, doffing their hats to every
senora. The English merchant, in his unassuming
undress of a white jacket; the British naval officers,
with their gay uniforms and careless manners, prying,
with a sailor’s curiosity, into every pretty
face; and now and then a saucy mid, mounted on a hack,
dashing between the line of carriages at a full gallop,
disturbing their propriety, and checking the cavalcade,
to the great consternation, real or assumed, of the
ladies. All was gaiety and gladness; on every
side was to be heard the merry laugh and hail of recognition.
To add to the excitement, the bands of the several
regiments played the most popular airs on a parade
adjoining to the esplanade.
While the carriages were driving up
and down, the vesper bell tolled from the cathedral.
In an instant every carriage stopped every
head was uncovered, and bent in an attitude of devotion.
Horses, women, men all as if transfixed:
every tongue silent nothing heard but the
bell of the cathedral, and the light breeze which
bore away its vibrations. The bell at last ceased,
and in a moment every thing was in full activity as
before.
Twice a week a military band plays
at the public almeda from nine till ten in the evening;
and on one of these nights we started in a carriage
to the spot. The almeda is situated close to the
gates of the city, and joins to the esplanade.
It is an open square, bordered with a row of trees,
to which are suspended lamps; while in the spaces between
the trees there are seats for the accommodation of
the public. In the middle of the almeda is a
stand erected for the musicians. On our arrival
there we found it well lighted up; the place was surrounded
by carriages, which were empty, their occupants having
joined the parade. Following the example, we
mixed with the throng, which was numerous. The
women were mostly collected in groups, and the men
were smoking their cheroots and beating time to the
music, which was excellent. Lighting our cigars,
we strolled lazily along, and, by dint of lamp-light
and impudence, managed to form a very tolerable idea
of the beauty of the senoras. At ten o’clock,
the band struck up a lively polka, which was the signal
for a general dispersion. This is considered
one of the principal and most favourite recreations
at Manilla.
The inhabitants of Manilla are composed
of the pure Spaniard, and the Mustichas, or mixed
breed. The former are very proud and inhospitable;
the latter are, on the contrary, very friendly, and,
for any little civility, request that you will make
their house your home. The women of the latter
are by far the most preferable: the former are
said to be very deficient in good-breeding and education;
like the Indians, they sleep half the day, and are
scarcely alive till sun-down, when they dress for
the almeda or esplanade.
There are very good subscription rooms
in the city. Every month they give a ball, concert,
or amateur performance. Strangers are presented
with tickets for these amusements no thanks
to the Spaniards but from the kindness
of the English merchants, who are nearly all members.
I went to one of these balls: there were plenty
of women more than could get partners;
the music was good, the women well dressed, and they
waltzed exquisitely. Adjoining the ball-room was
a billiard-room, in which those who preferred smoking
cigars in a cool room to dancing, with the thermometer
at 90 deg., had retreated. Nothing can be
done at Manilla without the cigar: they smoke
for an appetite, they smoke for digestion, they smoke
when they are too hot, they smoke when it is chilly.
As the hands of the time-piece approached the hour
of eleven, every one who lived outside the city was
obliged to be off. We, among others, took our
departure; but when we sought for our carriage, it
had disappeared. We set off at a hard trot, to
reach the gates before eleven, but in our haste we
missed the road, and came to a cul-de-sac.
We retraced our steps, but when we reached the gates
they were closed. A request to the officer of
the guard we knew to be useless, so we turned back,
and prepared to pass the night in the streets, in
our uniforms and swords. After wandering half
an hour up and down without seeing a light or meeting
a soul, I heard a violent hammering at a door at a
little distance. I found it was one of our party,
who hammered away, and called out for “Soda
water” between each hammering. “All’s
right!” said he; “look here!” And
sure enough there was a board outside, with “Soda
Water” painted in large letters in English.
This repeated hammering and demand for soda water
at last produced the desired effect. A person
in a dressing-gown and slippers came out into the
balcony, and demanded our business. We explained
our extreme thirst and benighted condition; and as
the gentleman hesitated, we again applied to the door,
intimating that if we had no admission, at all events
he should have no repose. At last he sent down
to have the door opened. We found that he was
a German chemist, who fabricated soda water, among
other articles, and, knowing the partiality of the
English for the beverage, had advertised it in our
language over the door. We passed the night with
him very comfortably at his house, breakfasted with
him the next morning, and, promising to bring the
whole of our shipmates to drink soda water for his
benefit till we were blown out like balloons, we wished
him good-bye, and returned to the ship.
Gambling is carried to a great extent
in Manilla: the game played is Monte. We
visited one of their gambling houses. Winding
our way down a dark and narrow street, we arrived
at a porte-cochère. The requisite signal
was given, the door opened cautiously, and after some
scrutiny we were ushered up a flight of stairs, and
entered a room, in the centre of which was a table,
round which were a group, composed of every class.
An Indian squaw was sitting by the side of a military
officer, the one staking her annas, the other his
doubloons. I stood by the side of an old Chinaman,
who staked his doubloon and lost every time. The
strictest silence was observed, and nothing was heard
but the chinking of the dollars, and the occasional
a quien of the banker, who inquired the owner
of the stakes. Every thing was conducted with
the greatest order; when one man had lost all his
money he would retire, and make room for another.
The authorities of Manilla have made every effort to
put a check to this demoralising practice, but without
much success. It is universal, from the highest
to the lowest, from the civilised to the most barbarous,
over the whole of the Indian Archipelago.
The Indians of the Phillippines are
among the best favoured of the Asiatic islanders,
but they are not reckoned so brave as the Malays.
They are a quiet inoffensive race, clean and well shaped,
and are all converted to the Catholic faith.
Their principal amusement is cock-fighting, which,
indeed, is carried to a great extent in all the islands.
Every man in the streets has his fighting cock under
his arm, and groups may be seen at all hours of the
day, pitting their cocks and betting on the issue.
The country about Manilla is very pretty, well cultivated,
and studded with thriving villages. The Spanish
possessions in this part of Luzon are confined to
about twenty miles in every direction; the interior
of the island being peopled with a race of savages
who occasionally make incursions into the country,
carrying away cattle or any thing else that they can
lay their hands upon. I could obtain no particulars
of these aborigines, except that they go nearly if
not altogether naked.
On the 1st of December, our old acquaintance,
the Velocipede schooner, arrived from Sooloo, having
on board six Lascars, who had been ransomed
from the sultan of Sooloo by Mr. Wyndham. They
had formed a portion of the crew of the Premier, an
English merchant vessel, which had been wrecked on
a reef off the eastern coast of Borneo. The crew,
consisting of Europeans and Lascars, had been
divided between the sultans of Sooloo, Gonong Tabor,
and Balungan. One of the Lascars was the
bearer of a letter from the captain of the Premier,
stating that he and his crew were still captives,
and trusting that a vessel would be sent to rescue
them, as they were strictly guarded by the natives,
and had no hopes of escape. The Samarang being
the only man-of-war at Manilla, the English consul
requested our captain to proceed again to Borneo to
obtain these people, calling at Sooloo in order to
obtain information and a pilot.
On the 10th of December we sailed
for Sooloo, where we arrived on the 15th. We
found the natives preparing for an attack, which they
anticipated from the French, and suspicious that our
intentions were also hostile. Having already
described Sooloo, I shall confine myself to events.
The captain, with his officers, went on shore, and
had an audience with the sultan; and having brought
an interpreter with us from Manilla, the conversation
was carried on without difficulty. Refreshments,
as lemonade, &c. were handed round as before, and,
as before, the room of audience was crowded to suffocation.
The prime minister, who was a little
corpulent man with an aquiline nose, wore such an
expression of low cunning, and eyed us with such ill-concealed
hatred, that we christened him Daniel Quilp, and he
was ever afterwards spoken of by that soubriquet.
Our object being made known, and the sultan’s
assistance demanded to obtain the remainder of the
prisoners, every obstacle that Quilp could throw in
our way was resorted to; and thus the audience became
very tiresome, and I paid little or no attention to
what was said, amusing myself by using my eyes, instead
of tormenting my ears. A heavy red curtain was
hung up, dividing the room into two compartments.
Observing that this moved once or twice, I endeavoured
to find out the cause, when several pairs of black
eyes, half hidden in the folds and rents, explained
the mystery; and whilst they were loudly disputing,
I was winking and making faces at the sultan’s
wives, who, stimulated by curiosity to behold the white
men, were thus transgressing the rules of the harem.
But old Quilp looked very hard at me, and for the
ladies’ sakes I was obliged to desist.
Behind the sultan stood a young man
very handsomely dressed in crimson silk, who held
in his hands an English finger-glass. We were
very much at a loss to know what his office might
be, and also what might be the office of the finger-glass;
but our curiosity was soon gratified; the sultan beckoned
the youth to approach, and as the latter presented
the finger-glass, his highness blew his nose in it.
Indeed, the misappropriation of English
utensils in this part of the world is very absurd,
although it is not surprising that an article coming
into their hands, the use of which they have no idea
of, should be appropriated to that use which they
consider it best adapted to. On the occasion
of a dinner given to us by the sultan of Bruni, the
whole party were seized with a fit of very indecorous
and immoderate laughter, by finding the centre dish,
which was a curry, served up in a capacious vessel,
which in Europe is only to be found under a bed.
The curry, nevertheless, was excellent; and what matter
did it make? “What’s in a name?
A rose by any other name would smell as sweet.” But
to return.
We remained eight days at Sooloo,
during which time there was much altercation and excitement.
At last the sultan of Sooloo agreed to send a prahu
with us to pilot us up the river, to the town where
the crew of the Premier were in durance.
During the time that we were at Sooloo,
we had evidence sufficient of the vindictive feeling
held by the rabble against Europeans, and at the same
time the various ways they resorted to, to give us
an idea of their superiority. They drew our attention
to some old cannon mounted on rotten gun-carriages;
they pointed out the strength of their fort, the sharpness
of their krisses and spears; and we could not but smile
at the false estimate of their and our capabilities.
They expressed curiosity to see our swords, which
are always made of finely tempered steel, although
not sharp edged, as they are required more for thrusting
and parrying. Of our mode of self-defence they
are ignorant, as they invariably cut with their krisses;
their first attention was, therefore, drawn to the
edge of the sword; passing the thumb along it, and
finding it blunt, they expressed the greatest contempt
for the weapon. It was useless to show them the
thrust and parry movements, or to prove the well-tempered
steel by bending the blade till the hilt and point
were almost meeting. A sharp iron hoop in their
ideas was preferable to all the best English workmanship.
The Sooloo knives are larger than they usually are
in the Archipelago, and of superior manufacture.
By rubbing them with limes and exposing them to the
sun, they stain them in a manner quite peculiar to
the place.
Partly to the machinations of our
friend Quilp and the irritable and proud disposition
of the people, who considered that the sultan was
humiliated by listening to reason and remonstrance,
we were more than once very near coming to blows.
At last every thing was arranged amicably; and just
before starting, the prime minister, Quilp, and a
large party of chiefs, condescended to pay a visit
to the ship.
To guard against treachery, for Quilp
was equal to any thing, the marines were kept under
arms, and supplied with ball cartridges. The
ship was soon crowded with chiefs, armed to the teeth,
and accompanied by men with muskets, spears, and shields.
It certainly did not look like a very amicable visit
on their part, or a very friendly reception on ours;
but the ship wore a very gay appearance. The guns,
nettings, and booms were covered with the chiefs and
attendants dressed in very gay colours. Groups
of them sat down on the decks, and made their remarks
upon what they beheld; while numbers prowled about
up and down, examining, peeping, and wondering.
We amused them with firing congreve rockets, guns,
&c., which gave them some idea of our value, and we
therefore combined instruction with amusement.
They departed highly pleased and astonished, and it
was evident that we were some degrees higher in the
estimation of Quilp himself.
The prahu ordered to pilot us having
come alongside, we hoisted her up abaft, and took
the people on board, and then made sail for the hitherto
unknown territory of Panti river. We anchored
off the main land on the 25th December, that we might
discover the mouth of the river, which was unknown
to us. Our Christmas-day was not a very happy
one; we did nothing but drink to the hopes of a better
one the ensuing year. On the following day we
weighed, and moved some distance up the river, and
then anchored, waiting the return of the prahu, which
had been despatched up to the town the night before.
We had, by the means of warping and towing, gained
about fifteen miles up the river, when we found that
it divided into two branches, and, not knowing which
branch to take, we had anchored, waiting the return
of the prahu. As she, however, did not make her
appearance, although she had had quite sufficient time
allowed her, the boats were therefore manned and armed,
and we started in search of the town Gonong Tabor.
As bad luck would have it, we chose the left branch
of the river, and, after two days’ unsuccessful
search, came back just as we went, but not quite so
fresh as when we started. The prahu had not yet
returned, so, taking a new departure, we proceeded
up the right branch. This proved a fine broad
river; one portion of it, studded with small islands,
was very picturesque. We soon hove in sight of
what appeared to be a town, although there were no
signs of life visible. It was built on the left
side of the river on two small hills, but we heard
no gongs or tomtoms sounding, the usual alarm of all
the Malay settlements on the approach of strangers.
When we arrived off it, we found that the town was
deserted. It had evidently but a short time back
been a populous and flourishing place, but it had been
destroyed by the enemy, as, although the houses were
standing, the cocoa-nut and other trees had been all
cut down. On the brow of the hill were many graves;
one, which was stockaded and thatched, and the remnants
of several flags fluttering in the wind, denoted the
resting-place of a rajah. He little thought when
he was alive that his head would be transported to
a head house some 20,000 miles distant, but such was
his fate: science required it, and he was packed
up to add to the craniological specimens in the College
of Surgeons, the gentlemen presiding over which are
as fond of heads as the Dyaks themselves.
We moved up the river till nightfall,
and then anchored. We were satisfied from appearances
that we were not far from a town, and, loading our
arms, we kept a very strict look-out.
At daylight the next morning we weighed
anchor, and, having passed two reaches of the river,
we came in sight of the towns of Gonong Tabor and
Gonong Satang. We pulled towards them, with a
flag of truce, and were immediately boarded by a canoe,
which contained the prime minister, who made every
profession of good-will on the part of his master,
the sultan of Gonong Tabor. We observed with
surprise that he hoisted a Dutch flag, which he requested
that we would salute. The captain replied, that
they must first salute the English flag, and, if they
did so, he promised to return the salute. This
was complied with; the English flag was saluted with
twenty-one guns, and an equal number returned.
The boats were then anchored off the town.
Immediately after we had returned
the salute, we heard an attempt at music, and this
was soon explained by the appearance of a procession
filing through the gates of the town towards the boats.
It was headed by a Malay, bearing the standard of
Gonong Tabor, red, with a white border;
he was followed by another carrying a large canopy
of silk, highly ornamented, and fringed with lace.
After this personage came the prime minister; then
two musicians, one playing the drum, and the other
a flageolet of rude construction. These musicians
were dressed in red bordered with yellow, with cowls
over their heads. The rear was composed of a
body-guard of Malays, well armed. The whole advanced
towards the landing-place, having been sent by the
sultan to escort the captain to the palace. The
captain and officers landed, and, escorted by the
natives, proceeded to the palace, the red silk canopy
being carried over the head of the captain as a mark
of honour. The sultan, a corpulent but fine-looking
man, received us very courteously. He informed
the captain that all the white people belonging to
the Premier had been ransomed by the Dutch, whose
trading vessels were in the habit of visiting Gonong
Tabor. The captain of the Premier had refused
to acknowledge the Lascars as British subjects,
and, in consequence, the poor fellows had been retained
as slaves. They were not, however, at Gonong
Tabor, but at Baloongan, a town of some importance
up a neighbouring river. He added, that four
of the Lascars had fallen victims to the climate,
and that there were twelve still remaining at the
above-mentioned town. It appeared that, from some
misunderstanding between the sultans of Gonong Tabor
and Gonong Satang relative to the disposal of the
English prisoners, they had come to blows, and were
at this time at open warfare, the two towns being
within gunshot of each other. Gonong Satang was
built on a hill on the opposite side of the river,
and was strongly stockaded as well as Gonong Tabor.
The sultan expressed his desire to
enter into an amicable treaty with the English, and
offered our captain his assistance in procuring the
release of the Lascars at Baloongan. This
offer was accepted, and, when we left, a prahu accompanied
us to that town.
In the course of the evening the sultan’s
prime minister and suite visited the barge, which
was moored within a few yards of the landing-place.
We surprised them very much with our quick firing,
but their astonishment was unbounded at the firing
of a congreve rocket, which they perceived carried
destruction to every thing in its flight. The
grand vizier was in ecstasies, and begged very hard
that the captain would go up to Gonong Satang, and
just fire one or two at their adversaries in that
town. This, of course, was refused.
We here fell in with a most remarkable
tribe of Dyaks: they wore immense rings in their
ears, made of tin or copper, the weight of which elongated
the ear to a most extraordinary extent. On their
heads they wore a mass of feathers of the Argus pheasant.
They wore on their shoulders skins of the leopard
and wild cat, and neck-laces of beads and teeth.
They were armed with the usual parang, blowpipe, and
shield. They were a much larger race of men than
the Dyaks of the north coast, but not so well favoured.
We remained here five days, and on the 1st of January,
1845, went down the river to the ship, accompanied
by the prahu which was to be our guide to Baloongan.
The following day we sailed for Baloongan, and on
the 3rd we anchored off the bank where the Premier
was cast away. Her ribs and timbers were left,
but the natives had carried away every thing of value,
except a small anchor, which they had not ingenuity
enough to recover. Leaving the ship at anchor
here, we again manned the boats, and, accompanied
by the pilot prahu, proceeded up the Saghai river:
the next day we arrived in sight of Baloongan.
Heaving to, to load our guns, and get our fire-arms
in readiness (for we expected a hostile reception),
we then hoisted a flag of truce and pulled up to the
town. What first occupied our attention was a
green plot in front of the town, on which were mounted
from fifteen to twenty guns, which were continually
pointed so as to bear upon us as we pulled up, and
which were backed by some thousands, I should think,
of Malays and savages, all well armed with spears
and knives. This looked like business, but we
pulled on, with the white flag still flying. A
canoe came off, containing, as at Gonong Tabor, the
prime minister. He waved with his hand, ordering
us to anchor, and pointing to the guns, which the natives
still continued to train after us. The captain
refused to anchor, and pulled on; we were then almost
abreast and within thirty yards of the battery.
As we passed it within ten yards, the natives kept
the muzzles pointed at our boats, and we expected
them every moment to fire. Had they done so,
we might have received considerable damage; but what
would their loss have been when we had opened with
round, grape, and canister, and congreve rockets,
upon such an exposed and densely crowded multitude?
They contented themselves, however, with yelling, which
does not kill, and, passing the battery, we dropped
our anchor close to the gate of the stockade by which
the town was surrounded.
In passing the battery, and refusing
to anchor, the captain adopted the most prudent and
safe course; for we had long before discovered that
decision is absolutely necessary with these people.
The least hesitation on our part would have fortified
their courage to attack; but they are so much awed
by our superior arms, and I may safely add the superior
courage of our men, that they never will, however much
they may threaten, be the first to come to blows,
provided there is no vacillation or unsteadiness on
our parts. This the captain knew, and acted accordingly.
After returning their salute of twenty-one
guns, the captain, with some of the officers and a
party of small-armed men passed through a line of
Dyaks to the hall of audience, which, as usual, was
crowded to excess with armed Malays. The sultan,
who was a stout athletic man, received us very cordially,
but his confused manners and restless eyes showed that
he was not at his ease. His dress consisted of
a yellow satin jacket, over which he wore another
of purple silk, worked and hemmed with lace.
His trousers and turban were made of similar materials.
Shoes and stockings he had none, and wearing both
jackets open, his chest was exposed. The sultan
acknowledged that the Lascars were still in his
territory, but, as two of them were at some distance
in the interior, it would require a few days to bring
them in. He appeared very glad that the business
was settling so easily, for he no doubt expected an
inquiry and a demand for all the ship’s stores,
the major portion of which had found their way to
Baloongan. The chain cables must have been invaluable
to the natives, and I detected several links which
had been partly converted into spear-heads.
There was nothing worthy of remark
in the town of Baloongan. We were very much interested
in the Dyak tribes, who were the same as those described
at Gonong Tabor, and in greater numbers. They
were equally tall, and appeared to be the very perfection
of savage warriors. They invited us several times
to pay them a visit on the hills, where they resided.
These Dyaks appeared very friendly to us, and one of
them, an intelligent fellow, of the name of Meta,
volunteered to take a letter overland to Mr. Brooke:
his mode of travelling was by pulling up the Saghai
river to its source in his canoe, till he came close
to the source of the Coran, and by his account the
two rivers nearly meet. He took the letter, binding
it round his head with a piece of linen; but I do
not know if ever it was delivered. One observation
I made relative to these Saghai Dyaks, which was,
that much as they must have been astonished at our
arms and equipments, like the North American Indians,
they never allowed the least sign of it to be perceived.
At the end of a week the prisoners
returned in a very miserable condition. They
had been at work, pounding paddy and digging yams;
and they stated that they had not sufficient allowed
to eat to support existence, besides being beat about
the legs with bamboos. Two of the twelve died
evidently from ill treatment and exhaustion. Their
gratitude at being delivered from their slavery was
beyond bounds; and it certainly is not very creditable
to the master of the Premier to have abandoned them
in the way he did, when a word from him would have
procured their liberty.
We returned to the ship, and the next
day ran down to the Premier Reef; the captain then
went again to the Panti river, in the boats, to conclude
the treaty with the sultan of Gonong Tabor. This
was soon accomplished; and giving him an union jack
to hoist, at which he was much pleased, we bade him
farewell.
We finished the survey of the Premier
Shoal, as it is now named, and then steered for the
island of Maratua, which the sultan of Gonong Tabor
had by his treaty made over to the English, representing
it as having an excellent harbour and good water;
but on our arrival we were much disappointed to find
an island surrounded by reefs, with only one intricate
passage through them and sufficiently wide only for
boats. Probably the sultan knew no better.
As we were very short of water, we now made sail for
Sooloo, and fell in with the Sooloo prahu, which had
been sent to us as a pilot, and which we had never
seen since she went up the river Panti before us.
She had been waiting for us outside, and the people
were very much pleased at finding us, as they feared
being taken by the pirates of Tawee-Tawee. After
having been nearly wrecked on a reef, and having grounded
on another, we anchored off the Lugutan islands, and
despatched the two cutters in search of water.
One of them attacked and burnt a prahu, because she
looked suspicious; the other did better, she discovered
a stream of water, off which we anchored the same
evening. Having completed wood and water, we sailed
for Sooloo, where we arrived on the Sunday. We
were surprised to find a French squadron anchored
in the bay. It consisted of the Cleopatra, 50-gun
frigate, Rear Admiral Cecile, with an ambassador on
board, the Victorieuse, 22, and the Alchimede
war steamer. They were treating with the sultan
of Sooloo for the island of Basilan, the natives of
which had beat off their boats, with the loss of a
lieutenant and four men killed and many wounded.
The island of Basilan is subject to Sooloo, although
the natives have refused to pay tribute for many years.
The French, aware of this, and wishing to establish
a colony in the East, offered the sultan 20,000 dollars
if he would make over the island to them; but this
was not acceded to, the chiefs being divided on the
question. The people of Sooloo have a great dislike
to all Europeans, but particularly to the French.
Treacherous as we and the French knew them to be, we
little thought to have it proved in so fearful a manner.
About a mile to the right of the town is a spring,
where all the ships watered. One day some peculiar
looking berries were found in the pool, which, on examination,
proved to be deadly poison, the natives having thrown
them in with the intention of poisoning us en masse.
The water was of course started overboard, and intelligence
sent to Admiral Cecile, who was highly incensed.
It was singular by what means this
discovery was made. One of the seamen of the
Samarang complained of a stinging sensation in his
feet from having wetted them in the pool. Our
assistant surgeon happening to be on shore at the
time, caused the watering to be stopped, and the pool
to be examined. Buried in the sand, at the bottom
of the pool, and secured in wicker baskets, were found
those poisonous berries, which the natives had concealed
there. As soon as Admiral Cecile received the
information, all the water was thrown overboard, and
the boats of the whole squadron, manned and armed,
landed the French admiral, the ambassador, and our
captain. They repaired to the palace of the sultan,
who not only expressed his abhorrence of the attempt,
but promised to put to death the parties if they could
be discovered. The attempt did not, however,
stop here. In addition to fruit, the boats at
Sooloo brought off rice cakes, which were eagerly
bought by the seamen. Some of the chiefs issued
an order for a large number of poisoned cakes, which
they intended for our consumption; but fortunately
the order was so extensive that it got wind, and we
were warned of what was intended by a native of Manilla,
who had been captured by pirates and sold at Sooloo.
In reward for this intelligence, we gave him, and
others of the same place, a passage to Manilla, taking
care, however, that they should be smuggled on board.
Sailed for Manilla, staid there a few days, and then
went to Batan, from thence to Hong Kong, where
we arrived on the 1st of April, and found the Iris
and Castor in the harbour.
There never was, perhaps, so rapid
a rise in any settlement made by the English as that
of Hong Kong, considering the very short time that
it has been in our possession. Where, two years
back, there existed but a few huts, you now behold
a well-built and improving town, with churches, hotels,
stores, wharves, and godowns. The capacious harbour
which, but a short time ago, was only visited by some
Chinese junks or English opium clippers, is now swarming
with men-of-war and merchant ships. The town
extends along the base of the mountain. Every
day some improvement takes place in this fast-growing
colony, but, from the scarcity of building ground,
house rent is very dear, and every thing has risen
in proportion. The town which, from the irregularity
of the ground, has but one street of importance, lies
under the highest part of a rock, which is called
Possession Peak. It is built on a kind of ledge,
but this is so steep that the basements of the back
houses can be seen over the roofs of those in the
front, although the houses are no further apart than
is necessary for the streets. Above the town the
rock rises almost perpendicularly; but every spot
which can be built upon is appropriated, and scattered
buildings may be seen half way up the rock, only accessible
by tortuous and narrow paths. The houses are built
of white freestone; many of them are handsome erections,
and on a fine day the town of Victoria has an imposing
appearance.
The island is now intersected by roads,
in some parts necessarily precipitous, but equestrians
can make the circuit of Hong Kong without any other
risk but from the marauding Chinese, who, in spite
of the police, still find means of exercising their
vocation. To the left of the town of Victoria
is a very pretty valley, but in the middle of it is
a swamp, which renders the place so unhealthy that
no one can reside there: some who did, died there;
and there are one or two neat little villas on it,
now untenanted and falling into ruins. Strange
to say, it still bears the name of Happy Valley.
The harbour is completely land locked,
and has two entrances. One side of it is formed
by Hong Kong, the other by Kow-loon, which is part
of the mainland.
But all this has its reverse.
The unhealthiness of the climate is very great, and
this is impressed upon the stranger while at anchor
in the roads; for the first object that meets his
eye is the Minden hospital ship, with her flag continually
half mast high, announcing that another poor sailor
had gone to his long home. When you land you will
certainly meet a funeral; and watching the countenances
of the passers by, their sallow complexions,
and their debilitated frames, with the total unconcern
with which they view the mournful processions, you
may assure yourself that they must be of daily and
hourly occurrence. And such is the fact.
I was sorry to find that murders and
robberies were most frequent at Hong Kong, although
the police force has been augmented from London, and
is under the charge of an experienced officer.
While on shore, I observed the body of a Chinaman
rise to the surface, disfigured in a horrible manner,
and although notice was sent immediately to the authorities,
it was allowed to remain beating against the wharf
till late in the afternoon, when it was towed out
and sunk in the middle of the harbour.
I once witnessed the punishment of
a Chinese robber at the market gate; he had been apprehended
on the preceding night. His tail, which was false,
and filled with blades of knives, needles, &c., came
off in the officer’s hands. However, he
was secured, and received a daily allowance of fifty
lashes, which was continued as long as he was capable
of bearing the punishment, and then he was sent to
work on the roads.
I left H. M. S. Samarang at this port,
and joined the Iris, commanded by Captain Mundy, whose
high character as an officer and a gentleman I well
knew; unfortunately I was only lent to the Iris, and
the consequence was, as will be seen, I had ultimately
to return to the Samarang. I found that the Iris
was to sail for the north coast of China, and I was
delighted at the idea of visiting those parts, which
there was little chance of if I had remained in the
Samarang.
One object of the Iris proceeding
to the coast of China was to carry General D’Aguilar
and suite on a visit to the most interesting of the
hostage ports. We sailed on the 6th of April,
and after a week’s beating arrived at Chapel
Island, at the mouth of Amoy bay. This bay is
very spacious, being nearly thirty miles deep.
To the left of the entrance is a high peak, on the
summit of which is built a splendid pagoda, serving
as a landmark to vessels coming from seaward.
The town of Amoy is built at the bottom of the bay.
Close to it, and forming an inner harbour, is the
island of Ku-lang-so, near to which we dropped
our anchor. Ku-lang-so is a pretty island,
about a mile in diameter. Up to the evacuation
of Amoy it had been occupied by our troops; and the
remains of a race course and a theatre prove that
the gallant 18th had contrived to amuse themselves.
At the present time it is all but deserted, the only
European residents being Mr. Sullivan, the Vice Consul;
the Chinese, who had been driven from it at the capture
of the city, not having as yet returned. The
houses on it are prettily disposed, and some rich
foliage and green pasture give an English character
to the scenery, and are very refreshing, after continually
looking at the everlasting paddy fields, which constitute
the principal features of the sea coast of China.
It is to this circumstance that I ascribe the exaggerated
accounts we have of the beauty of the island of Ku-lang-so.
It forms, however, a very pleasant promenade, and
may be enjoyed without interruption from the inhabitants.
The city of Amoy is built on a low neck of land.
The houses are of a dusky tint, and from the anchorage
are indistinguishable through forests of junks’
masts, which surround the town. To the right
of the town, and extending to some distance, is a
fortified wall, which gave some trouble at the capture.
I landed with a party to walk through the city.
The streets are narrow and dirty, the open shops on
either side reminding you very much of Constantinople.
The population is immense, the streets are always
crowded. We soon found that we were objects of
attention, and were followed by a mob. It was
with difficulty that we could force our way; and, moreover,
the town having been lately evacuated by our troops,
the Chinese thought themselves secure in venting their
animosity, by pushing, jostling, and throwing stones
at us. In this, however, they were mistaken, for
being a tolerably strong party, and knowing that they
had a very wholesome fear of us, we were not slow
in resorting to blows when intreaties proved in vain;
and, before we were in the middle of the town, more
than one celestial head had come in contact with the
pavement. One had the impudence to bellow in
my face; for which impertinence he received a facer,
which gave him something to bellow for. Those,
however, who “were at a distance had the means
of annoying with impunity, and we were glad to take
refuge in a pastry cook’s shop, which happened
most opportunely to present itself.
On our entering, we were each presented
with a pair of chop sticks, and a large tray was placed
before us, filled with sweetmeats of every description.
There were nutmegs and other spices, ginger, sugar
cane, bamboo, and the knee-bone palm, preserved in
the most exquisite manner. Every thing was so
novel, chop sticks not excepted, that it was quite
fearful the extent to which we indulged in the sweetmeats;
however, as we had no maiden aunts ready with their
doses, as in our infancy, we ate and spared not.
Cakes of the most recherche description, and pastry,
the lightness of which would have shamed Gunter, were
each and all in their turn discussed; and what was
our astonishment to find that, on calling for the
bill, the charge amounted to about sixpence.
We visited as much of the town as
the mob would permit, but I shall reserve my description
of a genuine Chinese town until our arrival to the
northward. The joss-houses at Amoy are not remarkable,
and one description of these buildings will suffice
for all.
We lay at Amoy for about a week, during
which the Mandarins paid us a full dress visit.
They were extremely cautious, and remained on board
for a couple of hours. At their departure we gave
them the economical Chinese salute of three guns.
During our stay here I amused myself principally on
the island of Ku-lang-so, and I was not sorry
when we weighed anchor, and, with a fair wind, made
sail for Chusan.
Chusan is the largest of a closely
packed group of islands, near to the main land of
China, and about 500 miles to the northward of Amoy.
These islands, many of them very diminutive, are so
close to each other, that on threading them to approach
the town of Chusan, the channel wears the appearance
of a small river branching out into every direction.
If the leading marks were removed it would be a complete
marine labyrinth, and a boat might pull and pull in
and out for the whole day, without arriving at its
destination. Narrow, however, as is the passage,
with a due precaution, and the necessary amount of
backing and filling, there is sufficient water for
ships of the largest size. At sunset we anchored
off the town of Chusan. Here the islands form
a beautiful little harbour, sufficiently capacious.
The island being covered with tea plants, the panorama
is pretty and refreshing. From the anchorage little
can be seen of the town, as it is built on a flat,
and hidden by a parapet and bank of mud, which runs
along the bottom of the harbour. This temporary
fortification is called a bund, and was erected by
the Chinese previous to the capture of the place.
Behind this bund is an esplanade, parallel with which
are houses, which serve as barracks for the troops,
and the residences of the civil and military functionaries.
The country is hilly, and several commanding forts
are visible from the anchorage.
On landing, we directed our steps
to the town by a causeway which leads from the landing-place
to the gates between the fields of paddy, which are,
as usual, swamped with water. The sides of this
causeway are lined with shops; and the island being
occupied by the English, soon stared you in the face,
in the shape of boards in front of each shop, bearing
such inscriptions as “Snip, from Pekin,”
“Stultz, from Ningpo,” and others equally
ludicrous, in good English letters. There were
“Buckmasters” and “Hobys” innumerable;
Licensed Victuallers and “Dealers in Grocery.”
Passing a tolerably well constructed gate, guarded
by an English sentry, we entered the town. The
streets are cleaner than those of Amoy, and not so
narrow; but what gave us most satisfaction was, that
our appearance excited no attention; and we enjoyed
our walk, and made our observations uninterruptedly.
Our first visit was to a toy-shop:
a great many articles were exposed for sale, and many
very beautiful carvings; they were, however, far too
delicate for a midshipman’s chest, and the price
did not exactly suit a midshipman’s pocket.
A silk warehouse next occupied our attention:
here we were shown some beautiful embroidery, some
of which was purchased. After walking over the
whole town, we proceeded to the principal joss-house:
this was very handsome; but I was sorry that it had
been selected as a barrack, and was occupied by a
company of sepoys. The altar was converted into
a stand for arms, and the god Fo was accoutred with
a sheath and cross belt. To complete the absurdity,
a green demon before the altar was grinning maliciously
from under the weight of a frieze coat. At the
entrance of the joss-house is a covered porch, under
which are two figures sitting, and in this posture
nearly twenty feet high. The interior of the
house is handsomely ornamented and gilt; and behind
the altar there is a row of some fifteen figures, in
a sitting posture, all gilt from head to foot, and
forming a very goodly assembly: they represented
old men wrapped in togas, with faces expressive
of instruction, revelation, and wisdom. There
was nothing Chinese in their features; the heads were
shaved, and it is to be presumed that they represented
the prophets and holy writers who flourished antecedent
to the great Fo. The expression on their countenances
was admirable; and surprised us the more, from a knowledge
how fond the Chinese are of filling their temples
with unnatural and unmeaning devils.
We then visited a smaller god-house:
this the 8th regiment had converted into a theatre.
Very little traces of a holy temple were discernible;
and the great Fo occupied a corner of the green-room.
The scenes were painted in fresco, and the whole affair
was very tolerably arranged. Most part of the
scenery had been painted by my brother during his stay
at this port in the Cambrian. The Chinamen consider
this no sacrilege, as they always use the temples
as theatres themselves.
During the winter months Chusan is
very cold, and the snow lies on the ground. The
country there abounds with game deer, swans,
partridges, pheasants, and wild fowl of every description:
the prices are very moderate; a fine buck may be purchased
for a dollar, and a brace of pheasants for a rupee.
It was now the month of May, and the swans and geese
had departed, and game was becoming scarce as the weather
became fine; still, however, there was a duck or so
to be picked up, so I joined a party bent on trying
their luck, and we prepared for a hard day’s
work.
No one who has not tried it can have
an idea of the fatigue of a day’s shooting at
Chusan. Having a Chinese covered boat, we loaded
her with quite sufficient to support nature for twenty-four
hours; and pulling about four miles through the channels
intersecting the islands, we landed about daylight.
Before us was a vast paddy field, into which we plunged
up to our knees in mud and water. As we approached
one of the dykes which convey the water for the irrigation,
caution was observed, not a word was uttered by one
of the party, and our good behaviour was rewarded
by a brace of fine birds, which were deposited in the
bag, carried by a celestial under-keeper. Crossing
the dyke, we continued to wade through the paddy fields,
shooting some plover and a red-legged partridge, until
we arrived at a Chinese village. We passed through
it, and fell in with a herd of water buffaloes, as
they term them. One of them charged furiously,
but the contents of one of our barrels in his eyes
made him start in mid career; and having had quite
enough into his head, he turned to us his tail.
These animals show a great antipathy to Europeans,
probably from not having been accustomed to their dress.
Red, of course, makes them furious, and, thanks to
his jacket, a drummer of one of the regiments was
killed by these animals. Towards evening we felt
it quite impossible to wade any further; and although
nightfall is considered the best time for shooting
ducks, we thought it was the best time to return to
the boat, which we did not regain, fatigued, hungry,
and covered with mud, till ten o’clock at night.
One day, strolling in the country
about four miles from Chusan, we fell in with a very
pretty little house surrounded with trees. The
courtesy usually shown to the English at Chusan induced
us to enter it, that we might inspect the premises.
Its owner, a mandarin, was absent, but his major-domo
took us over the whole house. The round doors
and oyster-shell windows amused us greatly. The
garden was ornamented with artificial rocks, studded
with flowering shrubs, with great taste. There
were two or three grottoes, in one of which was a joss;
and an arbour of lilacs and laburnums, in full bloom,
gave a charming appearance to the whole. Thanking
the Chinaman for his civility, we went away, much
pleased with the mandarin’s country retreat.
During our stay at Chusan we had made
a party to go to the island of Poo-too, but we were
hurried away sooner than we expected, and our design
was frustrated. I will, however, give a description
of the island of Poo-too, as described to me.
This island is about forty miles from Chusan, and
is inhabited solely by priests. These being condemned
to a life of celibacy, no woman resides on the island,
which is covered with temples of all descriptions,
many of them very handsome, but one in particular,
which was built by the emperor. The island is
not large, and is laid out like a vast garden, with
squares and walks, bridges, &c.
We left Chusan, and soon afterwards
anchored off the mouth of the Ningpo River, which
is only thirty miles to northward and westward of the
Chusan isles. The first object of interest before
us was the famous joss-house fort, which gave us so
much trouble at the capture. General D’Aguilar
and Captain Mundy being about to visit the city of
Ningpo, a party of us obtained a week’s leave
of absence for the same purpose. We landed in
a ship’s boat at Chinghae, a small but tolerably
fortified town, which, however, needs no description.
There we obtained a covered Chinese boat, in which
we put our beds and blankets, intending to live on
board her during our stay at Ningpo. Starting
with a fair wind and tide, by noon we were within
five miles of the city, which is built about forty
miles up the river. The banks of the river appeared
to be highly cultivated, and the river was crowded
with boats of all descriptions, some going up with
the tide, others at anchor, waiting for the tide to
change, to go in an opposite direction. The first
that we saw of Ningpo was a low wall, from the middle
of which rose a tall pagoda. This, with innumerable
masts of the vessels lying off the town, was all that
was visible: nor could we discern much more on
a nearer approach. Threading the crowd of vessels
which filled the river, on our left we could only
see the wall and battlements of the town, the before-mentioned
pagoda soaring above every thing. To the right,
on the side of the river opposite to the town, were
several detached houses, surrounded with low shrubberies;
behind these was the Chinese country, and then the
eye wandered over countless paddy fields, until it
at last rested upon some faint blue mountains in the
distance.
Among the houses on the right was that of the vice-consul, Mr. Thorn.
Anchoring our boat as near to his landing-place as possible, we made
arrangements for the night, it being then too late to pay him the accustomed
visit. We had, however, scarcely spread our mattresses, and put some
supper on the fire, when we were hailed by a Chinese boy, and requested to come
on shore. Ignorant from whence the invitation might come, but nothing
loath, we hauled our boat to the jetty, and, landing, followed young pigtail,
who ushered us through a court-yard into a house of tolerable dimensions,
agreeably arranged according to English ideas of comfort. In five minutes
more we were introduced to Mr. Mackenzie, an English merchant, who, having been
informed of our arrival, had sent for us to request that, during our stay at
Ningpo, we would make his house our home. We would not tax his hospitality
so far as to sleep at his house, having already made our own arrangements; but
we willingly accepted his kind offer of being his guests during the day, and
proved our sincerity by immediately sitting down to an excellent dinner, and in
the evening we retreated to our boat. The next morning we breakfasted with
our host, and then crossed the river, to inspect the city. Having landed
at one of the gates, we hired a sort of sedan chairs, which were carried by two
athletic Tartars, and proceeded to examine a very remarkable building called the
Ruined Pagoda. I shall give Dr. Milnes description of it, taken out of
the Chinese repository, as I think it will be better than my own:
“We bent our steps to the Tien-fung,
called by foreigners the Ruined Pagoda. Foreigners
make for it as soon as they enter the east gate.
After shaping their course in a south-east direction
through numberless streets, it abruptly bursts upon
the view, rising 160 feet above their heads, and towering
high above the surrounding houses. The pagoda
is hexagonal, and counts seven stories and twenty-eight
windows. Above every window is a lantern, and
when the pagoda is illuminated, the effect is very
brilliant. This building is in much need of repair,
and is daily becoming more dilapidated. It has
already deviated many feet from the perpendicular,
and might not unaptly be described as the Leaning
Tower of Ningpo.”
Dr. Milne thus describes the view from the summit:
“The entire city and suburbs
lay beneath us; the valley of Ningpo, with its hamlets
and villages, hills and rivers, on every side; and
away in the distance, on the one hand chains of lofty
mountains, the sea, with all its islands, on the other.”
Dr. Milne asserts that Ningpo is 10,000 years old,
and that the pagoda was raised antecedent to the city
being built. He concludes by explaining the object
of the Chinese in raising these monuments.
The view from the summit is remarkably
fine, and the ruinous condition of the pagoda almost
warrants the supposition of its being nearly as ancient
as Dr. Milne asserts. I made a drawing of it,
and we then proceeded to the joss-house, which is
considered as the handsomest in the Celestial empire.
No part of the building was visible from the street,
and we stopped at an unpretending door where we dismounted
from our vehicles. A Bhuddist priest, clothed
in grey and his head shaved, ushered us through a
long gallery into the court-yard of the temple.
To describe this building accurately would be impossible.
It was gilt and carved from floor to ceiling.
The porch was supported by pillars of stone beautifully
carved with figures of griffins and snakes. In
the court-yard were two lions carved out of a purple
marble, and in the middle of the yard was an immense
brazen ram highly ornamented with hieroglyphics and
allegorical designs. As for the temple itself,
it was so vast, so intricate, and so various in its
designs and gildings, that I can only say picture
to yourself a building composed entirely of carving,
coloured porcelain, and gilding, and then you may have
a faint idea of it. I attempted to make a drawing
of it, but before I had obtained much more than the
outline, it was time to recross the river. We
dined and passed the evening with Mr. Mackenzie as
before. The next morning I walked to the Chinese
cemetery with my gun in my hand, and shot a few snipe
and wood pigeons, and after breakfast we crossed the
river to pay a visit to the shops of Ningpo. The
streets of the city are narrow, but superior to any
that we had yet seen. The principal streets are
ornamented with stone arches, and the huge painted
boards used by the Chinese for advertisements give
them a very gay appearance. We first entered
into a furniture warehouse, some 300 yards in length,
and filled with Chinese bedsteads carved and gilt
in a very splendid manner. These bedsteads consist
of moveable frames about twelve feet square, and within
them are disposed couches, chairs, tables, and the
requisites for the toilet, besides a writing desk,
so that a bedstead in China contains all the furniture
of the room. Some of these were valued at five
and six hundred dollars, but were very highly ornamented
and of exquisite workmanship.
A hat shop was the next visited.
Its interior would have been considered splendid even
in Regent Street. A long highly polished counter
with a top of cane-work, was loaded with the hats
and caps of Mandarins of every class, and the display
was very tempting to those who wanted them. We
then passed five minutes in a porcelain warehouse;
from the warehouse we went to a toy-shop, and being
by this time pretty well encumbered with mandarins’
hats and caps, gongs, and a variety of other articles
which we did not want, at the same time making the
discovery that our purses were not encumbered with
dollars as they were when we set forth, we thought
it advisable to leave off shopping for the day.
The next day we visited the Hall of
Confucius, which was not worth seeing, nor could we
discover to what use it was dedicated, so we turned
from it and went off to see a Chinese play. As
we proceeded to the theatre we were surprised to hear
a lad singing “Jim along Josey,” we turned
round and found it was a real pig tail who was singing,
and we inquired where he learnt the air. We found
that he had served on board one of our vessels during
the Chinese war, so we hired the young traitor as
a cicerone during our stay at Ningpo, and ordered him
to follow us to the theatre, which as usual was a
temple or joss-house.
We found it crowded with Chinese,
and the actors were performing on a raised platform.
Our entrance caused a great sensation, and for a short
time the performance was unnoticed by the audience.
Our beaver hats quite puzzled them, for we were in
plain clothes; even the actors indulged in a stare,
and for a short time we were “better than a play.”
The Chinese acting has been often described: all
I can say is, that so far it was like real life that
all the actors were speaking at one time, and it was
impossible to hear what they said, even if the gongs
had not kept up a continual hammering, which effectually
drowned the voices. At all events they were well
off in the property line, being all very showily dressed.
Fireworks were at intervals exploded, and occasionally
a tumbler would perform some feat, but I felt little
interest in the performance, and kept my eyes on the
gallery containing the ladies, among whom I saw one
or two very pretty faces.
The wall round Ningpo is built wide
enough for a carriage drive. It has embrasures,
but no guns were mounted. By ascending some steps
near to the town gate we found ourselves on the top
of the wall, and walked half round the town on the
parapet. It was very extensive, and, as far as
the eye could reach, the plain was studded with country
houses of a slate colour.
I forgot to mention that while here
we visited a sect of Chinese nuns or female devotees.
They were assembled in a large room, at one end of
which was an image of the god Fo. Each nun was
seated at a small table on which was a reading stand
and a book of prayers. They were all reading,
and at the same time beating a hollow painted piece
of wood: the latter duty was, we were informed,
to keep up the attention of the god. What with
them all gabbling at once, and the tapping noise made
with the wood, god Fo appeared more likely to have
his attention distracted than otherwise. However,
it was of no consequence, as Fo was one of that description
of gods mentioned in the Bible, among whose attributes
we find, “Ears have they, but they hear not.”
We remained here a week, and I was
much interested with what I saw; but so much has already
been written about the Chinese, that I wish to confine
myself to what may be considered unbroken ground.
As the time fixed for our departure approached, we
determined to go to Chinghae overland, in chairs.
Taking a farewell of our kind and hospitable host,
Mr. Mackenzie, we each took a chair, and took our departure.
The road was interesting, being at one time through
tea plantations, and at another through paddy fields.
Our bearers were strong muscular fellows, and thought
little of carrying us twenty-five miles. We passed
crowds of Chinamen irrigating the land, and working
in the paddy fields. In some instances they favoured
us with a salute of yells and stones; and as we approached
Chinghae, the unwashed vented their feelings in some
very unpleasant ways. In the town we were followed
by a mob; and by the time we had reached the quay,
and procured a boat to take us off to the ship, the
whole town had turned out. Tapping one or two
of the most officious with the bamboo oars, we managed
to shove the boat off, and pulled on board.
We sailed for Chusan the same evening,
but this time I unfortunately was attacked by one
of the prevailing diseases of the country, and was
confined to my hammock. We revisited Amoy, and
then shaped our course for Hong Kong. On our
arrival, we found no ship there but the Castor, the
admiral and fleet being employed on the coast of Borneo,
subduing the pirates in Maludu Bay. The ship
being again about to start for the northward, I was
considered too unwell to remain in her, and was sent
on board the Minden hospital ship, to live or to die,
as it might please God.
The Minden hospital ship is a fine
74; and as all the guns, masts, and stores, had been
landed at the time that she was selected for the duty,
there was great accommodation on board of her; but
great as it was, unfortunately there was not sufficient
to meet the demands upon it in this unhealthy climate.
A description of her internal arrangement may not
be uninteresting. The quarter-deck and poop was
set apart for the convalescents; but the heat of the
sun was so overpowering, that it was not until late
in the afternoon that they could breathe the purer
atmosphere. Long confinement below had left them
pale and wan, and their unsteady gait proved how much
they had suffered in their constitution, and how narrowly
they had escaped the grave. To some this escape
had been beneficial, as their constant perusal of
the Bible established; others, if they even had during
their illness alarms about their future state, had
already dismissed them from their thoughts, and were
impatiently awaiting their return to health to return
to past folly and vice. The main deck was allotted
to the medical and other officers belonging to the
ship, the seamen who composed the ship’s company,
and also on this deck were located the seamen who
had been discharged cured, and who then waited for
the arrival of their ships, which were absent from
Hong Kong. On this deck, abaft all, was the inspector’s
cabin, and adjoining it the mess-room of the assistant-surgeons,
who, like all their class, rendered callous by time
and habit to their dangerous and painful duty, thought
only of driving away the memory of the daily mortality
to which they were witnesses by jovial living and mirth.
Indeed nothing could be a more harassing scene than
that of the lower deck, where the patients were located.
Under any circumstances an hospital is a depressing
and afflicting sight, even with all the advantages
of clean well-regulated wards, attentive nurses, and
pure ventilation. Imagine then the feelings of
a sick wretch, stretched on a canvass cot, who is
first hoisted up the ship’s side, and then lowered
down a dark hatchway (filled with anxiety and forebodings
as to his ever leaving the vessel alive) to the scene
of misery which I am about to describe the
lower deck of the Minden hospital ship.
This lower deck has on each side of
it three rows of iron bedsteads, for the most part
filled with the dead and dying; an intolerable stench,
arising from putrefaction, which it is impossible by
any means to get rid of, salutes his descent; and
to this is added the groans of lingering sufferers.
He may chance, God help him, to be lowered down at
the very hour of the inspecting surgeon’s visits.
The latter is seated by a bed, having probably just
performed, or in the act of performing, an operation.
The goodly array of instruments meets his eye, and
he wonders, as they are displayed, what these several
instruments of torture can be applied to; the groans
of the patient fall upon his ear, and his nerves are
so shattered and debilitated by disease, that the
blood curdles to his heart. The inspector writes
the particulars of the case on a printed form, while
the dressers are passing bandages round the fainting
patient. As soon as he is out of the cot which
lowered him down, the new arrival is washed, and clothed
in hospital linen, ready to be put into a bed.
Not unfrequently he has to wait till room can be made for him, by removing the
corpse of the last occupant, just deceased. He is then placed on it, a coarse
sheet is thrown over him, and he is left to await the inspectors visit, which,
as that officer has all his former patients first to prescribe for, may perhaps
be not for an hour or two, or more. At last he is visited, prescribed for, a can
of rice-water is placed at the head of his bed, and he is left to his own
thoughts, if the groans of those around him, and the horror that he feels at his
situation, will permit him to reach them. If he can do so, they must be any
thing but agreeable; and a clever medical man told me that this admission into
the hospital, and the scene which the patient was introduced to, was quite
sufficient, acting upon a mind unnerved by disease, to produce fever. Excepting
that the hospital was too crowded, which indeed could not be prevented, there
was, however, every arrangement for the comfort of the patients which could be
made under such a climate. No one was to blame the hospital for the military was
building, and until it was ready for the reception of the patients, the men of
both services were received on board of the Minden. But if the day is so trying,
who can describe the horrors of the night? The atmosphere becomes still more
foul and pestilential, from the partially closed port-holes, and from the
indifference of the nurses to the necessary cleanliness required. The whole
becomes alive with cockroaches and other vermin, creeping over the patients; and
the mosquitoes prey upon the unfortunate sufferer, or drive him mad with their
unceasing humming preparatory to their attacks. Add these new trials to the
groans of the dying, which, during my residence on board, never ceased, and at
night were more awful and painfully distinct. The nurses were all men, obtained
from the scum of the sea-ports, for no others would volunteer for the duty a set
of brutes indifferent to the sufferings of others. As long as they were, during
the day, superintended and watched by the officers, they did their duty, but at
night the neglect was most shameful. In fact, these wretches composed themselves
to sleep instead of watching. Patients may in vain call, in a feeble voice, for
water the only answer is a snore. On one occasion, having listened to the call
of a poor fellow for more than an hour, and each time in a weaker voice, for
drink, I was obliged to get up myself to wake the nurse, that the man might not
die of thirst.
My cabin, for all the officers were
separated from the men, commanded the whole view of
the lower deck, and I was compelled to be witness of
scenes of the most frightful description. An English
sailor had been hung for murder, in consequence of
his accomplice, who was by far the most criminal of
the two, having turned queen’s evidence.
This latter soon afterwards was brought on board the
Minden, having been attacked with the fever, and never
was there such an evidence of the racking of a bad
conscience. In his ravings he shrieked for mercy,
and then would blaspheme in the most awful manner.
At one moment the spectre of his dead comrade would
be invoked by him, requesting it to depart, or desiring
those around him to take it away. At others, the
murdered man was standing at his bed-side, and he
would attempt to run, that he might flee from the
vision. Thus was he haunted, and thus did he disturb
all around him till his very last hour, when he died
in an extreme of agony, physical and mental.
What a relief it was when this poor wretch was at
last silent!
Almost every day there was to be seen
a Roman Catholic priest administering the last unction
to some disciple of his faith, some Irish soldier
or sailor, whose hour was come. On these occasions
the amputation table was his altar, and a brass flat
candlestick the only ornament. He never failed
to be at his post every day, and was a good old man.
At the same time that the old priest was officiating
by the side of one bed, the chaplain of the ship would
be attending the last moments of some other victim.
On these occasions all would be silent on the deck,
even the groans were stifled and checked for the time,
and nothing would be heard but the muttered prayer
of the Catholic priest, or the last, and often futile,
attempts of the clergyman of our own creed to extract
some sign of faith and hope from the fast-sinking and
almost senseless patient.
“He dies, and makes
no sign! O God, forgive him!”
At times the uproar on the deck would
be appalling. Some powerful man in the strength
of delirium would rise from his bed, and, bursting
from some half-dozen of the nurses, would rush through
the tiers of beds roaring like a bull, and dealing
blows right and left upon the unfortunate sick men
who fell in his way. Then there would be general
chase after him, until, overpowered by additional help,
he was brought back to his bed and confined by force.
An hour or two afterwards, the nurses who watched
him would quit the side of the pallet; a sheet would
be thrown over it; no other communication was necessary
to tell me that the storm had been succeeded by a
calm, and that life’s fitful fever was over.
At the forepart of the hospital deck
is a bath room; adjoining to that is a small dark
cabin, with no other furniture than a long white-washed
board, laid upon two tressels, with hooks fixed to
the carlines of the deck. Above these the dead
bodies are removed: immediately after their decease
a post mortem examination is made by the assistant
surgeon, a report of which is sent into the inspector.
A port-hole has a wooden shoot or slide fixed to it,
by which the bodies are ejected into the boat waiting
to convey them for interment.
The church service is read every morning
on the hospital deck, and during the performance the
strictest attention was paid by the patients.
When convalescent I enjoyed the privilege of walking
on the poop with the others who had been spared, and
truly grateful was I for my recovery. Such scenes
as I have described could not but have the effect
upon me: I hope that I left the hospital a wiser
and a better man.
At last the time came when I was pronounced
by the doctors to be quite cured, and at liberty to
leave the ship. I hardly need say that I did so
with alacrity. I had always before this considered
Hong Kong as a most disgusting place; but now that
I had been so long cooped up with disease and death,
it appeared to me as a paradise. I had made one
or two acquaintances during my former visits, and
now found their kind offers too welcome to refuse
them. Having nothing to do, and not being even
obliged to present myself on board of the Mind en,
I enjoyed myself excessively in journeys and excursions
to the other side of the island. My acquaintances
were the officers of the 42d regiment, who were remarkably
kind and intelligent men, and during my stay I was
a great deal in their society. We one day made
up a party to visit Pirate’s Bay, a spot on
the Chinese main, about twelve miles from Hong Kong.
Starting early, we took our guns and the requisites
for a pic-nic. When we arrived at the spot, we
hired the only respectable house in the place, left
a native to make the necessary arrangements for our
dinner, and then started on a cruise to view the country.
We shot at any thing that came in our way, and by
noon our game-bag contained a curious medley of ducks,
paroquets, swallows, and water rats. By this time
the sun became so overpowering that we returned to
the house which had been hired for our accommodation.
Here we dined, and returned to Hong Kong well pleased
with our trip. The roads at Hong Kong, though
not particularly good, have been made at great expence.
Large rocks have been cut through to afford communication,
and the quantity of rivulets running down from the
mountains, have rendered it necessary to build innumerable
bridges. There were but few good horses on the
island; but I managed to procure a tolerable one,
and in the evening would ride out by “Happy Valley,”
and return by dark, the only exercise which the heat
of the climate would permit, and which was necessary
to restore me to health. Society is in a queer
state here, as may be imagined when I state, that the
shipowner won’t associate with the small merchant,
and the latter will not deign to acknowledge a man
who keeps a store. Under these circumstances,
the army and navy keep aloof, and associate with no
class. There were very few ladies at Hong Kong
at this time, and of what class they were composed
of may be imagined, when I state that a shopkeeper’s
sister was the belle of the place, and received all
the homage of the marriageable men of Hong Kong.
Hospitality to strangers is as yet unknown, and a
letter of introduction is only good for one tiffin,
or more rarely one dinner. I made several excursions
in the country, but did not find any thing worth narrating,
or describing with the pencil.
It is here worthy of remark, that
there is every prospect of all the enormous expense
which has been bestowed upon this island being totally
thrown away, and that those who have speculated will
lose all their money; in fact, that in a few years
Hong Kong will be totally deserted, and all the money
expended upon it will be lost. To explain this
I must mention a few facts, not probably known to
my readers.
When, many years ago, the trade with
foreigners was first permitted by the Chinese government,
Canton was selected as the port from which it should
be carried on. The Chinese government had two
reasons for making this selection: their first
was, their dislike and jealousy of foreigners induced
them to select a port at the very confines of the
empire where the communication with them should take
place, so that by no chance the foreigners should
obtain any thing like a footing in or knowledge of
their country; the second reason was, that by so doing
they obtained, at the expence of the foreigners, a
very considerable inland revenue from the tea trade.
Canton is situated at least 500 miles from those provinces
in which the tea is grown, and the transit to Canton
is over a very mountainous range, at the passes of
which tolls are levied by the government, which are
now said to amount annually to seven millions.
The assertion, therefore, of the Chinese government
that they do not care about the trade is very false,
for they have derived a great revenue from it.
The opening of the more northern ports,
which was obtained by the war with China, has already
made a great difference, and every year will make
a greater. Shang-hai, one of the ports opened,
and the farthest to the northward, is situated on
the confines of the great tea country, and vessels
going there to take in their cargoes avoid all the
duties of transit, and procure the tea in a much better
condition. The merchants of Canton, moreover,
who traffic in tea, are all of them for the most part
people of the province of Shang-hai, who resort
to Canton to look after their interests, but now that
the port of Shang-hai is opened, their merchants
are returning to their own country, the English merchants
are settling at Shang-hai, and the vessels are
going there to load with tea direct. Already
a large portion of the traffic has left Canton and
gone to Shang-hai, and it is but natural to suppose,
that in a few years the tea trade will be carried
on altogether from that port, as the expence of transit
over the mountains and the duties levied will be avoided,
as well as the advantage gained of having the tea in
a much better condition when shipped on board.
How the Chinese government will act when it finds
that it loses the great revenue arising from the trade
being carried on at Canton remains to be seen, but
it will, probably, succumb to another war, if such
is considered necessary. It will be a curious
subject of interest to watch the fall of Hong Kong,
of Macao, and also of Canton itself, with its turbulent
population, which must, when the trade is withdrawn,
fall into insignificance.
The great error of the last war was,
our selection of such an unhealthy and barren island
as Hong Kong as our pied-a-terre in China, when
we might have had Chusan, or, indeed, any other place
which we might have insisted upon. We thought
that Chusan was unhealthy because we barracked our
soldiers in the swamps, and consequently lost many
of the men, when, as it is a most healthy and delightful
climate, had the barracks been built on the hills,
we probably should not have lost a man. Even now
it is not too late. The Chinese dislike our propinquity
to their coast at Hong Kong, and the last expedition
will have the effect of increasing this dislike.
I think, with very little difficulty, the Chinese
government would now exchange Chusan for Hong Kong,
if it were only to keep such unpleasant barbarians,
as the English have proved to be, at a more respectable
distance. If we had possession of Chusan, the
trade would come to our ports. The Chinese junks
would come to us loaded with tea, and take our goods
in return. The trade would then be really thrown
open, which at present it is not.
Murders and robberies were of daily,
or, rather, nightly occurrence at Hong Kong, the offenders
being Chinese, who are the most daring robbers perhaps
in the world.
I must now detail the events of a
cruise of the Samarang during the time that I was
in the Iris, and I avail myself of the private journal
of one of my friends.
May 9th, sailed from Hong Kong to
Batan, to complete the survey of the Bashee group.
On the 20th we left Batan to run to Ibyat, about
twenty miles from the former island, and although
a high table land, it is low when compared with Batan.
I never saw an island less inviting in appearance
than Ibyat. We landed at the foot of a precipice,
nearly perpendicular, and ascended to the summit by
means of rough ladders, placed upright against large
masses of rock; on either side of which were gaping
chasms, the very sight of which were sufficient to
unnerve us. This plan was not only the best for
landing on this strange island, but, as the natives
informed us, was almost the only one where a landing
could be effected without great danger. It was
near sunset when we landed; the boats returned to
the ship, leaving us to partake of the hospitality
of the padres from Batan, who had taken a
passage in the ship, as they had some spiritual business
to transact on this island. About 8 P. M., we
arrived at the village of San Raphael, where we slept
in a house set apart for the use of the padres.
This village is situated in the centre of the island,
built in a valley and on eminences which surround
it. The most commanding position is occupied by
the church and mission house, both of which are much
larger, although built of the same materials, and
on the same plan, as the houses of the natives.
There was but one room in the mission house, which
was scantily furnished with some heavy wooden chairs,
and some cane settees for bed places; however, thanks
to the kindness of the padres, we contrived to
make ourselves very comfortable. There are four
villages in the island, San Raphael, Santa Maria,
Santa Lucia, and Santa Rosa; each consisting of about
forty houses, containing about 300 people; so that
the population may be taken, at a rough guess, at
about 1200. The natives profess the Roman Catholic
religion, and appear to be very sincere in their devotion.
Divine service is performed morning and evening, at
which time the boys and girls of the village walk
to the church in two lines, chanting a hymn to the
Virgin Mary. Each line is headed by the youngest
of either sex, bearing a cross. The boys wore
nothing but the middle cloth, and the girls were almost
as scantily clothed; the only garment being a skirt
or petticoat, not larger than a moderate sized pocket-handkerchief.
During two days our friends, the padres, were
fully occupied with the important ceremonies of marriage
and baptism. Many of the parties joined in matrimony
were mere children. They all had, on this important
occasion, some addition to their general costume.
The bridegroom, for instance, wore a shirt; some of
them had actually a pair of trousers. The bride
had an additional and large petticoat, and an embroidered
handkerchief. They were not at all bashful there
was no blushing no tears, and, on the contrary,
marriage appeared to be considered as an excellent
joke, and the laughing and flirtation were carried
on to the church door. The padres appeared
to be almost worshipped by the poor natives, who,
on their arrival and departure, respectfully saluted
their hands. But their great affection was shown
in a more satisfactory and substantial manner, by
the continual supply of goats, pigs, fowls, vegetables,
and fruit, which were liberally supplied during our
stay. I forgot to say that the marriage certificates
were of a very primitive kind; they consisted of a
laurel leaf, in which were rudely inscribed the names
of the bride and bridegroom. At length, having
finished our survey, we bid farewell to our hospitable
entertainers, and on the 27th made sail for St. Domingo.
We remained two days at St. Domingo,
and then weighed and steered to the northward.
On the 3d of June we landed on the island of Samazana,
near the south point of Formosa. The inhabitants
of Samazana are Chinese, although they pay no tribute
to the emperor. This island was first inhabited,
about twenty years since, by a party of Chinese sailors,
who were thrown on shore in a tempest. They afterwards
returned to Amoy, where, having persuaded several
families to join them, they returned to Samazana,
and colonised it. The fertility of this island
has richly repaid them for their labour. The
village contains about 100 people, who are located
in about ten or fifteen houses. Paddy, sugar-cane,
and yams are grown in abundance, and ground nuts cover
nearly one third of the island. These Chinese
settlers keep up a trade with Amoy, from whence they
obtain what they require, in exchange for the productions
of their island. We found these people very civil
and obliging, but excessively dirty in their persons
and apparel.
About seven o’clock in the evening,
while we were dining on the beach, an earthquake shook
the island, the glasses jingled together, and all
our party were in involuntary see-saw motion, like
the Chinese figures. This lasted about ten seconds.
Several of us, who had never before experienced the
sensation, were much relieved when the shock was over,
as it created a suffocating sensation. During
the evening there were several other shocks, but none
of them equal to the first in violence. We remained
all night on the island, to ascertain the latitude
by the stars.
On the following morning we returned
on board, when we were informed that the ship had
struck on a reef on the preceding evening, at 7 P.
M. The lead was thrown overboard, but no soundings
were obtained, proving, beyond doubt, that the concussion
had been communicated to the vessel. She was
about four miles off the land at the time, and many
would not then be convinced that it was an earthquake;
although I believe it has been satisfactorily proved
that the shock has been felt by a vessel which has
been out of sight of any land.
On the 6th of June sighted one of
the Madjicosima islands. The master in the second
cutter left the ship, with a week’s provisions,
to survey the island, while we made sail for our former
anchorage at Pa-tchu-san, to obtain water.
On the 8th of June we arrived at Pa-tchu-san,
where we were received by our friends, the chiefs,
who appeared delighted to see us again. We learnt
through our interpreter that a French frigate had left
Loo-choo for Corea two months before twenty-seven
of their countrymen, chiefly missionaries, having
been murdered by the Coreans. It would appear
that the French missionaries, exceeding their vocation,
had wished to make some alterations in the Corean
form of government, but their attempts not meeting
the approbation of those in power, they fell a sacrifice
to their good intentions.
On the 9th we sailed for Sabangyat
to pick up the two cutters. We arrived there
the next day, and were joined by the master. We
received every attention from the hospitable and inoffensive
natives, who supplied us with pigs, fowls, and vegetables,
refusing to accept any thing in return. We returned
to Pa-tchu-san to rate our chronometers, and
sailed on the same day. The next morning we landed
on Hoa-pen, an island, but the cloudy weather prevented
us from obtaining the latitude. We landed during
the day, and remained on shore the whole night to
obtain our objects, and, I may add, were most cruelly
bitten by the mosquitoes as a reward for our zeal.
When we were returning to the ship
on the following morning, a large albatross alighted
on the water close to the boat. As we passed it,
it made several futile attempts to rise again on the
wing. It is well known that this bird cannot
fly while under the influence of fear, and so it appeared
in this instance, for, while we were passing it, a
shark thrust its head out of the water and took the
unfortunate bird down with him.
On the 16th we landed at Tea-qua-san,
where we captured great numbers of albatrosses, ferns,
and boobies. They actually refused to move at
our approach. This island is very small and uninhabited,
but it was evident that people had landed on it lately,
for in a cave we discovered several grass beds, remains
of game, and remnants of cooking. The weather
prevented us from making any observations, but it did
not prevent us from collecting several hundreds of
eggs, which we took on board with us. The next
day we saw a large rock, marked doubtful on the charts.
A heavy squall, which forced us to run before it for
several hours, prevented us from ascertaining its
position.
June 19. We found ourselves close
to the southern extremity of Loo-choo, the land of
which is low. About noon we anchored in the harbour
of Napa-kiang, and were boarded by several mandarins,
one of whom the captain recognised as the interpreter
of the Blossom, whose interesting cruise has been
published by Captain Beechey. The natives of Loo-choo
are so similar to those of the Madjicosima group that
it would be useless describing their manners and customs,
the more so as we have already the works of Captain
Hall and Captain Beechey, in which they are described
most accurately. A great many junks were anchored
in the inner harbour, their enormous masts towering
far above the highest buildings.
The burial ground is a large tract
of land to the left of the town; the tombs are large,
and in shape resemble the last letter in the Greek
alphabet ([Greek: Omega]). Strange that it
should be the last letter. Most of them are painted
white, and they have from the anchorage a very picturesque
appearance.
It was the captain’s intention
to have sailed on the day after our arrival, but the
weather proving unfavourable for astronomical observations,
our departure was postponed for another day, when,
having obtained sights, some live stock, and vegetables,
we sailed for Guilpat, a large island off the southern
extremity of Corea. Previous to our sailing,
a French missionary called on the captain. He
had been left at Loo-choo by the Alcimene frigate,
with a view of introducing Christianity into the island,
but the chiefs did not appear to relish his sojourn
there, and were anxious to get rid of him. He
offered to accompany us to Corea and Japan; at the
latter place he would have been of great service,
as he was acquainted with the Japanese language.
June 24. Sighted the Goth island,
a portion of the Japanese empire. The next morning
the wind had increased to a heavy gale, and we were
compelled to reduce our canvass to a close-reefed main
topsail, staysail, and trysail. We rounded Cape
Goth within a quarter of a mile, and lay to under
the lee of the island, where the sea was comparatively
smooth. Towards the evening the wind subsided,
and we again made sail. Saw the island of Guilpat,
and the next morning anchored off the north-east side
of it, in a channel between Guilpat and a small island.
We landed on the small island, where we were received
by about sixty natives, who did not appear well pleased
at our intrusion, but knew that resistance to us would
be useless.
In the course of the day several thousand
natives had assembled on the opposite shore.
By the aid of good telescopes we could discern forts
and flags. The natives informed us that Guilpat
had a standing army, well supplied with matchlocks,
swords, and bows and arrows. They added that
guns are not wanted to defend the island in case of
need. This assertion we afterwards found, making
allowance for a little exaggeration, to be quite correct.
The island of Guilpat is subject to
the kingdom of Corea, and is the largest in that archipelago,
being about thirty miles in length and fifteen in
breadth. It is composed of innumerable hills in
every variety of form, such as cones, saddles, and
tables. Most of these hills have forts built
on their summits. From these, lights were displayed
every evening, and it was astonishing the rapidity
with which these signals were answered. I have
seen the whole coast illuminated in less than five
minutes, each hill appearing like a little volcano,
suddenly bursting out. As soon as the boats had
surveyed this part of the island, we shifted the ship
to where the survey was being carried on; and this
we continued to do during the whole time that we were
employed in the survey, the boats returning on board
every night. Good anchorage is to be obtained
all round the island. Innumerable forts and batteries
are built along the coast; every rising ground being
surmounted with one, although the major portion of
them were not supplied with guns. We found as
we coasted along that all the forts were manned, the
people being armed with matchlocks, spears, and arrows.
On several occasions they fired their matchlocks,
and the salute was returned by the 6-pounders in the
barges, which never failed of putting them to flight.
In the centre of the island the land runs to an enormous
height, and terminates in a sharp peak, which, in
consequence of its always having been enveloped with
clouds, we did not see till several days after our
arrival.
At last we arrived at the principal
town, which is situated on the western side of the
island. The town was inclosed with thick walls,
higher than we had observed before as we coasted along.
These walls form a square, each side of which is about
half a mile in length, and has batteries, parapets,
and embrasures. In some of the latter there
were guns, which were occasionally fired. The
whole ground before the town, for the distance of
a mile and a half, was crowded with people; but if
they waited for our landing they were disappointed,
as the captain would not land. They gave us two
bullocks, which were put into the barge, as the ship
was then ten or twelve miles off. The mandarins
used every argument to persuade the captain to come
on shore and visit the chiefs of the island; but,
as we had but twenty men in the boats, he refused to
trust himself among eight or ten thousand whose intentions
were any thing but satisfactory. However, he
promised that he would come on shore on the following
day, but that at present he was obliged to visit a
point of the bay to obtain observations before sunset.
We now prepared to move in the barge, but found ourselves
encompassed by twelve or fourteen large boats, fastened
to each other by strong ropes. We desired them
to make a passage, but they either did not, or would
not, understand us. This looked very much like
treachery, and decided measures were become requisite:
the nearest boats were boarded, and the crews made
to cut their ropes. Some of them appeared inclined
to resist, but a smart stroke of the cutlass put their
courage to flight. This affair took place within
twenty yards of the beach, and in sight of 10,000
people on the shore. We now being clear, pulled
for the point and secured our station. A great
crowd collected around us while we were observing;
the chiefs expressed a wish, in a peremptory sort of
way, that the officers should partake of some refreshment
at a short distance from the beach. This the
captain, who suspected treachery, refused, and as
we were going near to our boats, some of the natives
laid violent hands upon our men, but having received
from them a few specimens of our method of boxing,
they soon quitted their hold. The Chinese interpreter
was now missing; our men in consequence procured their
arms, and landing, a strict search was made for him.
He was found some little distance on land, having
been enticed away by one of the chiefs, who was plying
him with sam-schoo. On his way to return they
forcibly detained him, and were in the act of conveying
him away, when the appearance of the armed party from
the boat surprised them, and they hastened to convey
their own persons out of reach of our bayonets.
It was not, however, our intention, or our policy,
to commence hostilities, only to show them that we
would not be trifled with.
We returned from the point to the
beach before the town, when the boat’s guns
were loaded with round and grape, and pointed at the
crowd assembled, in case of any further treachery.
The captain then landed with the small armed party,
all ready for resistance.
Music was now heard in the distance,
and soon afterwards one of the principal chiefs arrived,
walking beneath a silken canopy. He was attended
by two young lads and a band of spearmen, who prevented
the mob from approaching too close to his highness’s
person. The multitude shouted, and bowed their
heads to the ground as the chief passed them; the
latter took no notice of their acclamations, but
advanced in a very stately dignified manner towards
the captain, apparently keeping time to the music,
which was played by a band of men, dressed in a very
fantastic manner, on cymbals and instruments resembling
our clarionets.
The negotiations were now opened:
the captain expressed his surprise and disgust at
the treatment he had experienced at the point, where
he had been taking observations. The chief inquired
of the captain, in reply, why he did not shoot the
offenders? and assured him that, if the next time
he was annoyed by the rabble he would shoot a few of
them, it would have a very salutary effect upon the
remainder. In the course of conversation, the
captain informed the mandarin that England possessed
ships carrying 120 guns of larger caliber than those
on board of the vessel he commanded; and that altogether,
including large and small, the Queen of England had
800 vessels. This account was evidently discredited,
as it always was when such an assertion was made in
those seas, for looking round him and explaining the
nature of the communication to his followers, they
all laughed. Asang, the interpreter, then gave
them a history of the Chinese war, on which he dwelt
upon our immense resources, the size and number of
our vessels, and the fire ships (steamers) which we
had employed; but it was evident that the Quelpartians
did not believe one word of his assertions. Before
the conference was over, rice, cakes, and sam-schoo
were handed round, and the captain promised that he
would visit the chief mandarin on the following day.
By this time, the ship had come to an anchor in the
bay, and we returned on board.
The next morning we got the ship under
weigh, and brought her nearer to the town, so that
her guns could be brought to bear in case of need;
but when within 100 yards of the shore, and in the
act of going about, the ship struck with great violence
against a rock. Hawsers were laid out, and with
our usual good fortune, we again got into deep water,
and in half an hour anchored off the town in a favourable
position for cannonading it. We then landed our
force, consisting of all the marines, with the drummer
and fiddler, besides a party of small-arm men from
the blue jackets, all armed with muskets, bayonets,
and cutlasses. The officers, in addition to their
swords, carried pistols in their belts. A feu-de-joie
was now fired, for the double purpose of creating an
awe among the crowd, and ascertaining that all the
muskets were in good order; for the mandarin resided
some miles from the beach, and in case of attack we
must have fought hard to regain our boats and the
protection of the ship’s guns. All being
ready, the drummer and fiddler struck up a lively
air, and we commenced our march towards the mandarin’s
house, the officers being accommodated with horses.
After passing over a morass, the waters of which ran
sluggishly through the arches of a bridge, connecting
the suburbs with the city, we ascended a rocky eminence,
from the summit of which we had a bird’s eye
view of the city, and some portion of the interior.
We observed that the ramparts of the city were lined
with people. Our train was nearly a mile in length,
although the natives were walking ten or twelve abreast.
Immediately after our party came the band of the natives,
dressed in russet-coloured cloth, with shawls of the
same material; after them the mandarin, followed by
above 200 soldiers, a dense mob bringing up the rear,
with flags and banners displayed.
On the inland side of us was an immense
plain, bounded in the distance by high mountains,
whose tops were enveloped in clouds. This plain
was mostly cultivated; that portion of it which was
barren had been appropriated to burial grounds, several
of which we passed through. At the head of the
graves were stone figures intending to represent human
beings, but Chantry had not been employed. At
length, having walked round two-thirds of the walls,
we entered a defile, leading to one of the gates of
the city, but to our surprise, when we arrived at the
gate, we found that it was locked, and when the cause
was demanded, we were informed that the mandarin refused
to allow the soldiers to enter, but that the officers
would be admitted alone. This communication greatly
irritated the captain, and our position caused us some
uneasiness. We were inclosed within two high
walls in a narrow lane, our advance prevented by the
locked up gate, and our retreat must be through thousands
who had formed the cavalcade, and were now in our rear.
Our only passage was through this multitude, and I
hardly need say that we were convinced of the treachery
of the people. However, there was no time to
be lost: the word was given, the marines formed
a front line, cocked their muskets, and then brought
them to the charge bayonets; and in this way, the
crowd retreating before us, we forced our way back,
until we were again clear of the high walls which had
flanked us; but our position even then was not pleasant.
We had to pass the fort and several encampments before
we could arrive at the beach, which was at least four
miles distant. However, we put a good face on
the matter, and forcibly detaining one of the mandarins
upon the pretence that he must show us the way back,
with the threat, that upon the slightest molestation
on the part of his countrymen, we would blow his brains
out, we commenced our march back to the beach, our
two musicians playing with great energy, “Go
to the devil and shake yourselves,” which tune,
struck up upon their own suggestion, was the occasion
of great laughter among our party. At last we
reached the beach without opposition, and the mandarin,
who was terribly alarmed, was released.
When we arrived, the chiefs attempted
to throw all the blame upon the head mandarin, but
the captain would no longer stand their humbug.
He replied to them, that if any of their principal
men had visited the ship they would have been treated
with respect and kindness, and that the number of
their armed retainers would have made no difference
in their reception; that he considered them as faithless
in all their protestations of good-will, and from
thenceforth he should place no reliance on any thing
that they said; that for the future he would act as
he thought proper without consulting them, and that
he would shoot any one who attempted to interfere
with him. We then got into the boats and returned
on board, where we heard that the cutter’s crew
had been compelled to kill or wound some of the natives,
who had come down in a body and attacked one of the
men with fire-brands. The cutter was at anchor
a short distance from the shore; on the natives approaching
they seized their muskets, but did not fire until
their shipmate was in danger of his life. Two
of the natives had fallen and had been carried off
by their comrades.
The Quelpartians cultivate paddy (from
which they distil their sam-schoo), sweet potatoes,
and radishes, which, with shell-fish, form the principal
articles of food with the lower classes. Pigs,
bullocks, and fowls appeared to be plentiful, although
we obtained but few. All their towns are enclosed
with a stone wall; the houses are also built of stone,
and mostly tiled with a species of red slate; but we
had few opportunities of inspecting them, as the natives
kept so strict a watch upon us, and so outnumbered
us. These Coreans presented a strong contrast
to the Loo Chooans, who are so polite in their manner
and kind in their demeanour. These Quelpartians,
on the contrary, are very unprepossessing in their
appearance, rude and boisterous in their manner, and
of very gross habits. They insisted upon feeling
and inspecting every article of our clothing, even
baring our breasts to ascertain their colour, and
in many other respects proving themselves very annoying.
This was submitted to at first, with the hope of securing
their good-will, but afterwards very decided measures
were taken to repulse these dirty wretches, whose
clothes smelt most offensively. They have the
high cheek bone and elongated eye of the Tartar, or
northern Chinese, from whom I am inclined to think
they are descended. The crown of the head is
closely shaved, leaving a circle of long hair, which
is tied in a knot on the top of the skull (similar
to the people of Loo Choo), but without any ornament.
Round the forehead is fastened a bandanna, about four
inches in width, resembling fine net-work in texture,
but it is made with horsehair. This is used to
keep the hair in its proper position. But the
most singular part of their costume is the hat, which
is made of the same materials as the fillets:
the brim is about four feet in width, and this gives
to the wearer a very grotesque appearance. The
crown in shape resembles a sugar-loaf with the top
cut off, and is very small in diameter. It admits
the top-knot of hair, and nothing more.
The lower orders generally wear a
felt hat, but of the same dimensions and shape.
The hats of the mandarins are secured on their heads
by strings of amber beads and large ivory balls, and
then passed under the chin. Rank is denoted by
the peacock’s feather in the hat. The army
are distinguished by a tuft of red horsehair stuck
in the crown. The respectable part of the inhabitants
have several garments; the outer ones are of various
colours, but the cut of them extends to all ranks.
I can liken it to nothing but a long pinbefore, slit
up in front, behind, and at the two sides. Under
this they wear other garments, the texture and quality
of which, as well as quantity, depend upon the wealth
of the wearer. The sleeves of their dresses are
wide and long. In spite of their thick mustachios
and long flowing beards, they have the appearance
of a very effeminate people.
One evening we saw a large turtle
asleep as we pulled along the coast. A Sandwich
Islander, belonging to the gig’s crew, went in
the water and turned him, holding him in this position
till a rope was made fast to him, and he was secured.
At night we landed on a small island, and we cooked
our prize for our supper. I mention it as a proof
of the man’s dexterity.
Completed our survey of the Quelpart,
and stood to the N. E. The next morning we found ourselves
close to a labyrinth of islands, not laid down on
any chart. The captain named the group after the
ship; and, having in three days completed the survey
of them, we stood further to the northward and eastward.
It would be tedious to detail our surveying operations.
We saw the main land of Corea, but did not go on shore;
and our provisions getting low, we bore all for the
southward. After calling again at Quelpart, where
we remained a few days, we made sail for Nangasaki,
a seaport town in the empire of Japan.
We were some distance in the offing
in sight of the town of Nangasaki, when several boats,
gaily decorated with flags of various shades and colours,
came out to meet the ship and accompany us to the anchorage.
One of them brought a letter, written in mingled Dutch
and French, inquiring from whence and why we came.
The bearer, who was a great man in authority, desired
the captain to anchor immediately; but this the captain
refused, telling him that he should anchor his ship
when and where he pleased. We afterwards discovered
that these were all government boats, and that they
were always placed as a guard upon any ship which
visited Nangasaki.
The crews were all dressed alike,
in chequered blue and white cotton dresses; the boats
are propelled with sculls used as oars, the men keeping
time to a monotonous song. Forts, or rather the
ghosts of forts, appeared as if raised by magic; they
were easily distinguished to be formed out of immense
screens of coloured cotton, and they were surrounded
by flags and pennons. Although not effective,
their effect was good at a distance.
In the evening, a large assembly of
the principal men visited the ship; they wore very
loose jackets and trowsers. The jackets reached
no lower than the hips, where they were confined by
a silk or silver girdle, containing two swords, one
somewhat larger than the other. The handles and
sheaths of their swords were beautifully inlaid with
copper, and japanned in a very peculiar manner.
They were very curious to know the name and use of
every article which excited their attention, and we
were much surprised at their display of so much theoretical
knowledge. They particularly admired the touch-hole
of our guns, which are fired with the detonating tube.
The properties of the elevating screws were minutely
examined; and we were inclined to believe that many
of our visitors were artificers, sent on board to
examine and make notes of every thing new.
The Samarang was the first British
man-of-war which had visited Nagasaki since the Phaeton,
in 1808. The day after our arrival the chiefs
sent off a present of pigs, fowls, and vegetables,
but would receive nothing in return.
I accompanied the master to a small
island, to make observations. Several of the
great men desired us to return to the ship, but we
refused. They appeared greatly annoyed, and drew
their hands across their throats, intimating that
their heads would be forfeited for their breach of
duty. However, seeing that we were determined
to remain, they made a virtue of necessity, and consoled
themselves by examining our instruments. A laughable
occurrence took place while we were on shore.
The cutter was at anchor about ten yards from the beach.
Two of the crew having an argument, one of them drew
his bayonet, and made a lunge at the other in jest.
Observing the natives looking on with amazement, and
fancying that the men were engaged in deadly fray,
it drew our attention to the scene. They no doubt
came to the conclusion that we must be a desperate
set of fellows, and killed one another upon the slightest
provocation. At all events, this little incident
appeared to have a very good effect, as the natives,
who had continually been interfering with our observations,
now left us, not wishing to be so near to people who
were so prone to mischief.
During the whole night we were surrounded
by a squadron of boats, which, with lanterns lighted,
and drums beating, continually moved round the ship,
to intercept any boat leaving it. The captain,
finding that the suspicious character of the Japanese
would prevent any thing like correct surveying, which
was the principal object of his visit to Nagasaki,
determined upon leaving this inhospitable shore of
Japan as soon as possible.
On Sunday the 6th, we weighed, and
although the weather was unfavourable, contrived to
work out of soundings until 3 P. M., when we made
sail for Loo-Choo. At daylight we found ourselves
abreast of a burning volcano. Dense clouds of
smoke were issuing from a peaked island, about three
miles distant. We soon afterwards landed upon
an adjacent island, which, to our surprise, also began
to smoke.
The day was sultry, and without a
breath of air, so that in a short time, the atmosphere
we were in became overpowering; at last a fresh breeze
sprang up, and the disagreeable sensation wore off.
The whole of the islands between Loo-Choo and Japan
appear to be volcanic, and at certain seasons of the
year they break out in a similar manner to those which
we saw. At noon the smoke from the large volcano
became lurid; but whether this was the breaking out
into flame, or from the rays of the sun pouring down
upon the smoke, it was impossible to say, as we were
then several miles off. During the whole of the
following night we were becalmed, and during that
time impelled, by a strong current, towards the volcanic
island. Strange noises were heard, and large columns
of smoke ascended from the crater, which, from there
not being a breath of air, soon enveloped it from
our sight. On the following day we again landed
upon an island, some little distance to the southward
of the volcano, which now vomited flames, ashes, and
smoke, during the whole day. The master landed
on another of these volcanic islands, but the showers
of ashes and suffocating atmosphere soon drove him
away.
The captain had finished his observations
on the first island where we landed, and we prepared
to return on board. Since the morning the swell
had got up considerably, causing the surf to break
heavily on the rocks. However, the instruments
were safely embarked in the boat; but while the captain
was waiting for an opportunity to get in, a surf drove
the boat on a shelving rock, and suddenly receding,
her stern was dropped so low, while her bow remained
fast, that she capsized. Although the officer
and men in the boat had to swim for their lives, and
were much bruised by being dashed against the rocks
by the succeeding surf, fortunately no lives were
lost; but all the instruments, to the value of about
150l., went to the bottom, and, no doubt, have since
the accident very much puzzled the sharks as to their
use, as they often had done the natives of those seas.
A signal was hoisted on the summit of the island for
the ship to send boats to assist, and, on their arrival,
the gig was baled out, and by sunset we were again
on board.
August 18th. Exchanged
numbers with her Majesty’s ship Royalist, which
was anchored in Napa Kiang harbour (Loo-Choo).
At 3 P. M., we anchored alongside of her, impatiently
expecting letters by her, and we were not a little
depressed at being disappointed. Still we had
one comfort, which was that, instead of having brought
us, as we expected, three months’ provisions,
to enable us to continue our survey, she had only
fourteen days’ provisions for us, which was not
more than sufficient to carry us back to Hong Kong.
Many and various were the surmises that this recall
and alteration of our planned employment gave us; the
most prevailing one was that our orders from England
were at Hong Kong. Others supposed that the ship
would be hove down, and subsequently condemned; but
the rejoicing was universal at the idea that there
would be some speedy end to our hardships and vexations.
A day or two after our arrival the
captain and senior officers landed, to partake of
a dinner given by one of the principal mandarins.
They were well plied with soup, fish, fowls, and sam-schoo,
being attended on by minor mandarins. After dinner
they were escorted through the town, accompanied by
a large concourse of natives, who were kept by the
police at a respectful distance. One of the multitude
forced his way to join the captain’s party,
but was forcibly ejected, and preparations made to
bamboo him, when, to the captain’s surprise,
he discovered that the unfortunate culprit was our
greatest friend and ally during our visit to the Madjicosima
islands. He had been christened Beaufort by our
officers, in consequence of his accurate knowledge
of all the shoals, bays, deeps, &c. A word from
the captain released him, and to the astonishment
of the mob, the captain and officers shook him cordially
by the hand, and made him walk in their company during
the remainder of the day. We did not find out
why Beaufort left Pa-tchsu-san, where he appeared
to be one of the principal chiefs; while at Loo-Choo
he appeared to have no rank whatever. August
21st. Sailed for Loo-Choo, the Royalist
in Company. After looking in at Pa-tschu-san,
we made all sail for Hong Kong; but arriving off the
island of Botel Tobago, we were annoyed with light
airs and calms, varied with squalls and heavy rain.
For several days we were at the mercy of the current,
until, at length, we sighted Batan, and steered
towards it. The wind still continuing light,
the captain went in the gig, which was my boat, on
board of the Royalist; and we soon left the Samarang
far behind. We landed about three o’clock,
and were received by the padre, the governor and his
lady being at San Carlos. The commander of the
Royalist and two of his officers landed with us, and
were much pleased with the hospitality of the old
priest. In the course of the evening the governor
and his lady returned from San Carlos; we adjourned
to his house, where we passed the evening. Several
dances were performed by the native women; but we
did not admire them they shuffled with their
feet, and threw their bodies into anything but graceful
postures. At midnight we sat down to an excellent
supper, and then returned on board of the Royalist.
The following morning the ship was about three miles
from the anchorage. Bidding adieu to our hosts,
we pulled on board, and made sail for Hong Kong.
September 8th. It being
calm, the ship’s company were permitted to bathe.
In a minute all those who could swim were in the water,
playing about in every direction round the ship, and
enjoying the luxury. While this continued, the
man at the mast-head reported a shark close at hand.
The word to come in quickly was given by the first
lieutenant and all the officers. It required
no second call every one knew why, and
swam to the ropes, which were thrown out in every direction.
It was touch and go, as the saying is one
of the marines, who was last, was actually touched
by the shark, who made at him; but before he could
turn to bite, the fellow had jerked himself up out
of his reach. It was very fortunate that the
man at the mast-head kept so good a look-out, for
generally they are more occupied with the gambols of
the bathers than looking out for sharks. As it
was, many of the swimmers were so unnerved that it
was with difficulty they could get out of the danger.
After the men were on board again, the great object
was to have revenge upon the animal who had thus put
an end to the enjoyment. The shark-hook was baited
with a piece of bull’s hide, and the animal,
who was still working up and down alongside the ship,
hoping that he would still pick up a marine I presume,
took the bait greedily, and was hauled on board.
The axe was immediately at work at his tail, which
was dismembered, and a score of knives plunged into
his body, ripping him up in all directions. His
eyes were picked out with fish-hooks and knives, and
every indignity offered to him. He was then cut
to pieces, and the quivering flesh thrown into the
frying-pans, and eaten with a savage pleasure which
we can imagine only to be felt by cannibals when devouring
the flesh of their enemies. Certainly, if the
cannibal nations have the same feeling towards their
enemies which sailors have against sharks, I do not
wonder at their adhering to this custom, for there
was a savage delight in the eyes of every seaman in
the ship as they assisted to cut to pieces and then
devour the brute who would have devoured them.
It was the madness of retaliation an eye
for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth.
September 14th. Arrived
at Hong Kong, where we found the Castor, Vixen, and
Espiègle. The next day the Agincourt, Daedalus,
Vestal, and Wolverine, arrived from Borneo, having
been engaged with the pirates of Maludu Bay.
The squadron had suffered a loss of one officer and
eighteen men killed, and about double the number wounded.
This heavy loss was occasioned by their having to
cut through a large boom which the pirates had thrown
across the creek within half pistol shot of their forts.
But the official reports of Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane
have already been published, and I need not, therefore,
enter into further particulars. One incident
is, perhaps, worthy of notice, as it shows the respect
invariably paid by the British officers and seamen
to a brave enemy, although a pirate. The colours
from the pirates’ fort had been twice shot away,
when, to the surprise of the boat squadron, a native
was seen to ascend, without regard to our fire, and
nail the colours to the flagstaff. Instead of
taking aim at him, he was enthusiastically cheered
by the seamen; and, as if with one consent, the muskets
were all dropped, and the firing discontinued until
he had again got down under cover, and was safe.
The boom being at length severed, the fort in a few
minutes was in our possession. Our late first
lieutenant, Mr. Heard, who had left our ship, in consequence
of the treatment he received from the captain, was
wounded in this attack. Mr. Wade was the first
lieutenant who sailed from England in the Samarang,
and who also left us, not being able to put up with
the treatment he received. It is singular that
poor Mr. Wade should be killed so soon after he left
the ship, and that his successor, Mr. Heard, as soon
as he also left us, should have been wounded.
But these were not the only officers who had quitted
the ship: Lieutenant Inglefield, who joined the
ship as assistant-surveyor, was, like most of the
other officers, soon under an arrest; and after having
had a report spread against him that he was mad, he
determined to leave the ship, and obtained his Admiralty
discharge. The second master, appointed by the
Admiralty as one of the assistant-surveyors, also left
the ship, but was compelled to join again.
A court-martial was now held on board
of the Castor, to inquire into the conduct of Lieutenant
Heard (our late first lieutenant), during the time
that he served under Sir Edward Belcher. The court-martial
had been demanded by Lieutenant Heard, in consequence
of Sir Edward Belcher having written a private letter
to Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane, accusing Mr. Heard
of conduct unbecoming an officer and a gentleman.
The whole of the officers of the Samarang were subpoenaed,
and there is no doubt what the result of the court-martial
would have been; but the court was broken up on the
plea that the charges were not sufficiently specific,
as neither date nor circumstances were specified.
Before the court broke up, however, they did so far
justice to Lieutenant Heard, as to return his sword,
and state that there was not the slightest stain upon
his character, and that he was honourably acquitted.
The reader may perhaps ask, why the court was dissolved?
It was to save the honour of the cloth, that the court,
composed of captains, came to that decision. Had
the court-martial proceeded, what would it have proved? that
a superior officer had been guilty of slander, and
had attempted by this means to ruin a most excellent
officer. The court declared that the charges were
not sufficiently specific. Surely, they were plain
enough. Lieutenant Heard was charged with conduct
unbecoming an officer and a gentleman a
charge sufficient to dismiss him the service, if it
could have been proved. But let us reverse this
case: suppose that Lieutenant Heard had thus
slandered Sir Edward Belcher. Would the court
of captains then have discovered that the charges
were not sufficiently specific? Most certainly
not. The trial would have proceeded, and the lieutenant,
for making such false charges in a private letter,
would have been dismissed with ignominy from the service.
November 1st. Sailed from
Hong Kong, after a detention of some days, in consequence
of a row between Admiral Sir Thomas Cochrane and our
gallant captain; the admiral, as we understood, refusing
to allow the Samarang to leave the port until Sir
Edward Belcher had apologised for his insubordination
towards him. After a detention of a few days,
the apology was forced from Sir Edward Belcher, and
we were permitted to get under weigh. Of course,
I cannot exactly vouch for the correctness of this
statement, but such was the on dit of the day.
On the second we experienced a heavy gale, and the
Royalist, who was with us as a tender, parted company.
After a weary beat of nineteen days, we arrived at
Batan, the capital of the Bashee islands; but
I have already described this place. We remained
here eight days, anxiously expecting the Royalist,
but she did not make her appearance, and we concluded
that she must have received some injury in the gale,
and had borne up for Manilla. We sailed for that
place, and arrived there on the 2d of December.
Our conjectures relative to the Royalist were correct:
she was here at anchor, having crippled her foremast
in the gale, so as to render it necessary for her
to bear up for this port.
We had always enjoyed ourselves at
this place. During our repeated visits we had
made many acquaintances and friends, and it was with
no small pleasure that we found that we were to remain
here till the first day of the new year.
It is the custom at Manilla for the
inhabitants to throw most of their houses open on
that day: any one may enter, and be sure of a
hearty welcome from the hospitable Spaniards.
We anticipated great pleasure,-and we did nothing
but talk about it, as our last Christmas Day had been
a most dreary one, and we were delighted at the idea
of passing this one among hospitable and civilised
people. The reader may therefore imagine our
disgust and vexation when, on the 23d, without our
having the least notice of his intention, the captain
gave orders for the anchor to be weighed, and ran
the ship down to Caviti, a town about seven miles
distant. Caviti was deserted; all the inhabitants
had gone to Manilla to enjoy the holidays; not a soul
remained to welcome us; but if they had, it would
have been of no good to us, as, on Christmas morning,
about two o’clock, we were almost all of us sent
on shore to take a set of magnetic observations, which
were not completed until the same hour on the following
day. At the same time, to make “assurance
doubly sure” that we should have no pleasure
on that day, leave was stopped to all those remaining
on board of the ship. I will not enter further
into this affair. All I shall say is, that Christmas
Day, the day of rejoicing, the day of good-will, was
turned into one in which the worst passions were roused,
and in which “curses not loud but deep”
were levelled at the head of the man who, “dressed
in a little brief authority,” took this opportunity
of exercising the power entrusted to him. After
completing the observations, we moved further down
the Bay, and surveyed the shoals of St. Nicholas;
after which we returned to Manilla, where all gaiety
had ceased.
Caviti was once a place of great importance,
having been the capital of Luzon, from whence the
galleons conveyed the treasure to Spain. The
arsenal still remains, but in a very dilapidated state:
we found the artificers busily employed completing
some gun-boats and small schooners, which were
intended to accompany the Esperanza, Spanish frigate,
in an expedition to an island off Borneo, where the
Esperanza had latterly sustained a defeat from the
pirates who inhabited the island.
At Caviti lie the remains of an old
Spanish galleon, one of the few which had the good
fortune to escape Commodore Anson. The whole of
one side of the vessel is gone, and she is now fast
falling to pieces, but the Spaniards look upon her
with great reverence. She is a relic of their
former grandeur; and I was informed by a Spanish gentleman
that she never would be broken up. I looked upon
her, if not with reverence, at least with sympathy;
and as I made a sketch of her my thoughts naturally
turned to the rise and fall of empires, and I communed
with myself as to what would be the date in which
England would be in the same position as modern Spain,
and fall back upon her former glories by way of consolation
for her actual decay.
On our arrival at Manilla, whether
it was that the captain thought that we might too
readily console ourselves for our Christmas disappointment,
or that he had heard (which I doubt not was the case)
the expressions of disgust which had been so universal,
we found that all leave was stopped. A few of
us, not relishing this confinement without just cause,
made our appearance on shore in plain clothes; for
we had become reckless. We could but be turned
out of the ship and out of the service: we longed
for the first most especially, and were not alarmed
at the prospect of the second. But although the
captain was very willing to oblige us with the latter
as soon as he had done with us, upon the paying off
of the ship, he was not at all inclined to enter into
our views as to the former; for he knew that he never
would get another officer to join him. He therefore
took all the work he could out of us for the present,
bottling up his indignation for a future opportunity.
We visited the cigar manufactory.
About three thousand women are daily employed in making
and packing up the cigars. One party selects,
cleans, and moistens the leaf; a second cuts; a third
rolls; another packs them; and thus they are passed
through a variety of hands before they are completed.
The best cheroots made here are sent to the royal family,
and are called Finas. N. are the next best:
of these there are two kinds one for consumption,
another for exportation. The cheroots sold in
England under the name of Government Manillas
are of inferior quality. In consequence of the
failure in the preceding tobacco crop, cheroots were
very scarce during the time we were at Manilla.
There is a fine lace sold at Manilla,
called Pina-work. It is made by the women of
an island bearing that name, which is close to Luzon.
Although not so fine as some of the European manufactures,
it fetches very high prices in this country.
There is not sufficient made for exportation.
The night on which we went on shore
contrary to orders proved to be a festival, and the
city was illuminated. There is a variety in illuminations
all over the world, as those who have been to various
countries well know. The lower classes of Manilla
construct animals of all sorts, ships, &c. out of
coloured paper very good imitations of the
reality and these they illuminate by putting
candles within them. We had amused ourselves
with looking at the variety of objects exhibited by
the various whims of the illuminating parties, when,
on passing through a street, we observed a large illuminated
pig such a beauty! He was standing
at the door of a shop, and the owner was quite proud
of our unqualified admiration. We examined him
very carefully, and at last we unfortunately discovered
that he was fixed on a board with four wheels.
Wheels naturally reminded us that they were vehicles
of locomotion; the pig could move that
was certain and we decided that, if possible,
pig must go on board of the Samarang. This was
agreed to, nem. con., by all parties, with
the exception of the owner, who was not summoned to
the consultation, which, I grant, was an omission.
A ball of twine, some fifty fathoms long, was purchased,
and stretched along the street, so as to give us a
good start in case of a rescue. We manned it with
all hands except one, who was appointed to make it
fast to the pig, which he effected with great dexterity,
and without being perceived. As soon as he rejoined
us, off we set, followed by pig, who galloped and capered
down the streets in capital style, preserving his equilibrium
in a most astonishing manner.
But the owner of the pig soon discovered
his loss, and gave the signal for the chase.
As we passed the gates, the soldiers joined in the
pursuit, and a large mob followed; but pig beat them
all, and arrived safely at the hotel where we resided.
Of course, the owner soon came in to claim his property;
but he was so nobly remunerated for his animal, which
became ours by purchase, that he went away jingling
the money, and agreeing with us that it was an excellent
joke. We placed our pig in the centre of the
table, and passed our last night at Manilla in a most
agreeable manner.
We then sailed again for Caviti, which
was now again inhabited. The society is confined
to the families of the civil and military officers
who are stationed there. Some of the villages
in the vicinity of Caviti are very picturesque:
the bamboos planted on each side of the road meet
over head, and form shady lanes. The women at
these villages were handsomer than any I had seen
at Luzon, and were dressed very tastefully. A
petticoat, reaching from the hips to between the knees
and ankles, a not too jealous boddice of light muslin,
their long hair flowing down their backs, and a neat
straw hat, composed as graceful a costume as I have
ever witnessed. See two of these girls, both riding
one pony, taking eggs to Caviti, as they pass through
the shady lanes, and you cannot desire a more agreeable
picture.
January 3rd. From this
day till the 20th of February we were surveying various
portions of the Phillippine group; but as there is
nothing to interest the reader, I shall pass over
a dry catalogue of mostly uninhabited islands.
One of the islands was covered with cocoa-nut trees.
We found on it some Malays, who had come there on an
annual visit, and were loading their boats with the
nuts. They were the rudest of the Malay tribe
we had yet seen. Every article in our possession
excited their cupidity, and they expressed their wonder
and admiration by clacking their tongues against the
roofs of their mouths, and emitting a very strange
sound. A needle was valued by them at ten cocoa-nuts,
a button at five. For the value of a few shillings
we filled the ship with those highly esteemed fruit.
On the 21st of February we proceeded to Samboangan,
a Spanish penal settlement at the south extremity
of Mindanao. The town, which is insignificant,
is built on a plain. Most of the houses are constructed
of leaves and bamboo, supported by stakes. The
governor, however, and some of the most respectable
of the inhabitants, occupy neat little white-washed
cottages. There is a fine fort, in good condition,
and mounting several guns, which is garrisoned by
about 400 Manilla troops.
The town is surrounded nearly by groves
of cocoa-nut trees and bananas, and the roads cut
through them form pleasant shady walks. The plain
on which the town is built is well cultivated, and
watered by a fine river. It is bounded by a range
of mountains, which separate the Spanish possessions
from the country inhabited by the warlike natives of
the interior. The people appear well-conditioned
and industrious, and are remarkably neat in their
dress and persons. There are several gun boats
stationed here, which are employed to scour the coast
of the pirates, who are very numerous and formidable.
Horses can be obtained here in any
quantity, but saddles and bridles are scarce.
Unfortunately, there is nothing so civilised here as
an hotel, so few vessels visiting the port. The
little commerce that exists is carried on by small
schooners which run between this island and Manilla.
I have mentioned that this is the
penal settlement of the Spanish colonies. The
prisoners are confined within the fort, and there is
none of that awe of restraint and doubtful position
which you find in a place where half the population
consists of liberated convicts. It is a flourishing
and happy little colony. Many officers of an inferior
grade reside here, holding appointments either in
the fort, gaol, or the gun boats. These people
and their wives are Mestichas (or half-breed), and
it is among them and their families that some of the
prettiest women in the Asiatic archipelago may be
found.
Our first object after we were on
shore was to procure horses, that we might have a
view of the country, as far as prudence would admit.
We were surprised at starting to find such fine roads,
lined with gardens and cottages, embowered in groves
of cocoa-nut, bananas, and bamboos. Where the
road was not shaded, arches of wood were raised to
protect passengers from the heat of the sun.
The whole country was alive with natives, dressed
in every variety of colour, and sledges drawn by water
buffaloes, carrying fruit, vegetables, and Indian corn.
We put our horses to a swift canter, and passed through
many villages, all in appearance as populous, as thriving,
and as happy as Samboangan. At last we arrived
at an open plain, covered with cattle, and bounded
by the mountains in the distance. We remained
some time admiring and sketching; the inhabitants
showed us every kindness, and were more courteous in
their demeanour than might be expected from their isolation
from the rest of the world.
On our return, we stopped at a little
shop by the road side, close to the town. It
contained fruit, grain, and tobacco; but ascertaining
that coffee and chocolate could be had here, we ordered
some of the latter, which proved to be excellent,
and moderate in price. This little shop, for
want of an hotel, became our principal rendezvous during
our stay here.
About nightfall, as we were strolling
through the town, we were attracted by the sounds
of music in an adjoining street. We altered our
course accordingly, and on arrival at a large thatched
house, perceived through the open windows that it
was filled with musicians and dancers. We were
immediately observed, and the owner of the house, in
the most courteous manner, and in tolerable English,
requested us to enter, which request we immediately
complied with. We imagined that it was a ball,
perhaps a wedding; but what was our surprise on entering
to see a table in the middle of the room, on which
was placed a dead child! It was neatly dressed,
and ornamented with flowers, looking more like a wax
doll than a corpse. The ball, we were informed,
was given in honour of its funeral. The dancing
had not yet commenced, so we were in excellent time.
The master of the house was extremely polite, and requested
that we would consider ourselves at home. We
took his advice, and immediately separated, and paid
our addresses to the ladies which most interested us
by their appearance. A great many of them were
exceedingly pretty, and they were dressed enchantingly.
Their hair was drawn back, and collected in a knot
behind, their bosoms covered by a light muslin jacket
with short sleeves. A petticoat of many colours
was sufficiently short to disclose their naked feet,
on which was a slipper of velvet, embroidered with
gold or silver lace. Two or three great gold ornaments
completed their costume. Add to this their sparkling
black eyes, regular features, and an air of naïvete inseparable
from Spanish girls, and you have some idea of the
witchery of the belles of Samboangan.
We were very soon on excellent terms,
and the table with the dead child being removed to
a corner, the father and mother of the deceased opened
the ball with a slow waltz. This being concluded,
we selected our partners, and a livelier air being
struck up, off we all went at a splendid pace.
The women waltzed well. The music was excellent.
In the first round all the ladies lost their slippers,
which were without heels; and in the second the pace
became fearful, and the old house shook under the
active bounds and springs of some twenty or thirty
couples.
Spanish quadrilles succeeded the waltz,
and then we had the country dance. This latter
is complicated, but very pretty, and, with the assistance
of our partners, in a short time we were quite au
fait to its mysteries.
The music, which consisted of violins
and guitars, bore up indefatigably. About twelve
o’clock we ceased dancing, and preparations
were made for supper. This was laid on the floor,
clean grass mats serving as table cloths. The
contents of the dishes were of the most novel description,
and rice was the only article which I could recognise
as unmixed. The repast spread, the host requested
us to place ourselves. I followed my pretty partner’s
example, and came to an anchor on the floor alongside
of her. I was most assiduous in helping her to
whatever she pointed out; and, as nearly as I can
recollect, the plate contained a curious medley of
rice, prawns, fowls’ legs, apples, besides other
articles unknown, at least to me. I had observed
a total want of knives, forks, and spoons, but this
was explained when I saw that all ate with their fingers.
Seeing no objection to this primitive plan, I was about
getting a plate for myself, when I was informed by
my partner, in the most insinuating way, that I was
to consider her plate as my own. I fully appreciated
the compliment, and at once commenced, assisting her
to demolish the pile that I had collected, as I thought,
for her use alone. On looking round I found that
we were not singular, and that every couple were,
like us, dipping into one dish. Never was there
a more merry and delightful supper. As soon as
it was over, which was not very soon, for I could
have gone on eating a long while for the very pleasure
of meeting the pretty little fingers in the plate,
we rose, the mats and dishes were cleared away, and
we resumed the dancing, and it was at a late hour
that we made our buenas nochas to the fair girls
of Samboangan.
We remained in this delightful little
place for two days. Many of us were inclined
to remain there for life, if we could have escaped.
We made several excursions into the interior, and
the more we saw the more we were convinced that no
place was so pretty as Samboangan.
March 3d. Anchored in a
port at Baselan, where the Spaniards had very lately
founded a colony. We found them very busy felling
trees, clearing backwood, and completing the stockade
or fort. The natives of Baselan are a courageous
race, and were continually attacking the Spaniards,
occasionally with success. Two gun boats were
lying off the town, but the Spanish force is not sufficient
to meet the attacks of the natives, who continually
surprise their outposts and decapitate their prisoners.
On our arrival a discharge of guns and fire-arms was
kept up during the whole night, fully proving the
trouble which the Spaniards would have in establishing
and retaining their settlement here. It was a
few miles from this that the French were beaten off
by the Malays or pirates, for the terms are at Baselan
synonymous.
March 5th. Having completed
the survey of this port, we made sail for Balam-bangan.
On our route we stopped at Cagayan Sooloo, where we
fell in with two piratical prahus. For reasons,
not explained, these vessels were not interfered with,
although there was not the least doubt of their occupation.
March 9. The ship struck
several times while threading her way through a line
of dangerous shoals to the eastward of Bangay; and
on the same evening we arrived at Balam-bangan.
The Royalist had been despatched about
a month before to Sincapore, to obtain provisions
to enable us to survey the coast of Borneo. Balam-bangan
was the rendezvous appointed, and we expected to have
found her anchored there; but in this we were disappointed.
The survey of Balam-bangan was now commenced, and
during our survey we discovered the remains of the
old English settlement. It may be as well here
to concisely narrate the history of its rise and fall.
About the year 1766, four ships, filled with troops
and every thing requisite for the formation of a colony,
arrived at Balam-bangan, which was formally taken
possession of in the name of his Britannic Majesty.
But unexpected difficulties arose one after the other.
The natives of Bangay, about three miles distant,
were hostile, and made repeated attacks upon them.
The soil was discovered not to be of that fertile nature
which had been represented; and unfortunately two
of the ships were thrown on shore in a gale, and every
soul on board perished. These several disasters
damped their energies, and created a feeling of distrust
among the settlers, but still the original intention
was not abandoned. The forts were completed,
a few houses rose, and as their comfort and security
increased, so did their hopes arise, and they worked
with renewed vigour. But their prosperous state
excited the jealousy of the people of Sooloo, which
island is the emporium of the commerce between Borneo
and the other islands. The ruling powers of Sooloo
considered that this commerce must fall off if the
English established themselves on an island so well
adapted for it in every respect as Balam-bangan, and
they resolved to attack the colony in its infant state.
Perhaps they had another reason, which was that they
anticipated a rich booty, if successful, and no doubt
they were not disappointed. The attack was made
with an overwhelming force, and the English, although
they bore themselves bravely, could not resist it.
Most of the colonists were butchered, some few gained
the ships in the harbour and sailed away to the port
from which the expedition was fitted out. Since
that time no further attempt to colonise this island
has been made, nor, indeed, is it likely that there
will be, as Labuan is much more advantageously situated
in every respect.
The Royalist at last arrived:
she had but few letters, but, valuable and dear to
us as letters always were, she brought intelligence
that made every heart, except one, beat with delight.
Was it possible? Yes, it was true true!
We were ordered home. Oh, the delight,
the frantic joy, which was diffused through the whole
ship. To have witnessed the scene we should have
been considered as mad. Every one embracing one
another, shaking hands, animosities reconciled at
once, all heart-burnings forgotten: we could
have hugged every thing we met dogs, monkeys,
pigs except the captain. All our sufferings
and privations were forgotten in the general ecstasy,
and, although thousands of leagues were still to be
run before we could arrive at the desired goal, and
months must pass away, time and space were for the
time annihilated, and, in our rapture, we fancied
and we spoke as if we were within reach of our kindred
and our homes. Could it be the Samarang that we
were on board of? the same ship that we
were in not one hour ago? the silent, melancholy
vessel, now all hands laughing, screaming, huzzaing,
dancing, and polkaing up and down the deck like maniacs?
And then when the excitement was a little over, and
we became more rational, Why were we ordered home?
was the first surmise. We had been sent out on
a seven years’ expedition, and we had not yet
been out four. The surveys were not half finished.
Was it the row that the captain had had with the admiral,
and the reports of many officers who had quitted the
ship? We made up our minds at last that it must
have been upon the representations of the admiral
to the Admiralty that we had been ordered home.
There could be no other reason. We drank his health
in nine times nine.
On the 24th of March we sailed from
Balam-bangan, with the intention of making a flying
survey of the coast of Borneo, as far as the island
of Labuan and the country at Sarawak, to make the
best of our way to Sincapore, at which place we hoped
to arrive about the 1st of May, there to receive our
final orders and start for England. It would be
tedious, and it is not necessary, to give a description
of the survey which we afterwards made. We went
over the same ground as before, and we surveyed with
a musket in one hand and a sextant in the other, for
the natives were not to be trusted. Our warlike
friends at Tampassook did not much relish our re-appearance
on their coast. A Spanish slave made his escape
from them and came on board, begging a passage to any
where. He had been taken prisoner, with six or
seven others, in an engagement between the Manilla
gun boats and the Illanoan pirates, and had been very
cruelly treated. We learnt from this man that
the pirates of Tampassook are very rich, and possessed
a large number of fine prahus. They had also plenty
of fire-arms, but were afraid of them, preferring their
own weapons.
It was here that we heard the news
of the murder of our old friends Rajah Muda and Bud-ruddeen.
It appeared that they had been accused of being privy
to the attack of the English on Maludu, and supporting
our claims to the island of Labuan. Bud-ruddeen
died as he had lived, a brave man, and worthy of a
better fate. On the approach of his enemies he
retired to his house with his sister and favourite
wife, both of whom insisted upon sharing his destiny.
For some time he fought like a lion against a superior
force, until his servants one by one fell dead.
He then retired dangerously wounded to an inner chamber,
with his wife and sister, and, allowing his enemies
to follow him till the house was filled with them,
he fired his pistol into a barrel of gunpowder, which
had been placed in readiness, and at once destroyed
himself, his friends, and his enemies. But this
barbarous murder on the part of the sultan of Borneo
and his advisers was not left unpunished. Sir
Thomas Cochrane went to Bruni with his squadron, and
reduced the sultan to submission and a proper respect
for the English, and those who were friendly with
them.
As we approached Labuan we found it
necessary to be on the qui vive, as all the
natives were hostile to us, and would have cut off
our surveying parties if they had had a chance.
In the bay of Gaya, we met a brother of Bud-ruddeen.
He was the Rajah of the small province of Kalabutan.
Both he and his followers burned to revenge the death
of a man so universally beloved as Rajah Muda, and
offered to accompany us with their whole force to
attack the city of Bruni. They came on board
of us with fowls, eggs, and fruits. They placed
little value on dollars, preferring white linen, handkerchiefs,
and bottles, to any other article in the way of traffic.
We, therefore, as we were so soon going to England,
made no ceremony of parting with our old clothes in
exchange for stock; and the next vessel that visits
the river will be surprised at the quantity of midshipmen’s
jackets, sailors’ hats, and marines’ boots,
which will be worn by the inhabitants, in addition
to their own costume. Mr. Adams, the assistant
surgeon, had obtained permission to accept the Rajah’s
invitation to visit the town, which was some five or
six miles up the river. He saw nothing worthy
of remark except some of a tribe of aborigines (Dusums).
Their only covering consisted of large metal rings
worn round the neck and hips.
While a party were observing on shore,
a short distance to the northward of Kalabutan, they
were fired at by a party of natives concealed in the
jungle. The only person who was wounded was the
Spaniard, whom we had rescued at Tampassook, who was
standing by the captain. The ball passed through
his arm, and grazed his body. The arms were handed
out of the gig, which was close at hand, and the enemy
retreated into the wood. The cutter then joined,
and having a three-pounder on her bows, opened fire
upon the natives, who had re-assembled.. The first
two or three shots passed over their heads, and encouraged
by no injury being done to them, they came forward
dancing, yelling, drawing their knives and spears in
defiance. But a shot passing through the body
of the chief set them all off. They bore him
away on their shoulders, and did not afterwards make
their appearance. After cannonading the village
for an hour, and doing them all the mischief that
we could, by destroying their fortifications, burning
one and carrying off another prahu, we returned on
board, and then made sail for the island of Labuan,
where we arrived on the 25th of April, 1846.
Here our surveying was completed, and we made the best
of our way to Sarawak, where we arrived on the 30th
of April. We learnt all the news of the little
colony from Dr. Treecher, who came to visit us.
We found that Mr. Brooke had been
recognised by Government, and that Captain Bethune
had been testing the capability of making Labuan a
coal depot. Poor Williamson, the interpreter,
and a great friend of ours, had been drowned some
months previous, while crossing the river at night
in a small canoe, and no doubt fell a prey to the
alligators. He was not only a very amiable, but
a very clever fellow, and his loss was deeply felt
by every body.
Mr. Brooke was absent from Kuchin
on an expedition to the Sakarran river, in the Phlegethon
steamer, to inquire into the particulars, and punish,
if necessary, an attack upon his Dyak allies by the
natives of Sakarran. Two Sakarran chiefs, accompanied
by a great many war prahus, had paid a visit to Mr.
Brooke, and had been entertained by him in his usual
hospitable manner. At their departure he loaded
the chiefs with presents, for which they appeared
to be extremely grateful. As a return for this
kindness, and to prove their sincerity as allies, the
principal chief left his son, a boy of twelve years
of age, with Mr. Brooke. But notwithstanding
that this boy was as a hostage, they could not resist
an opportunity of plunder, and that very evening they
ascended one of the tributary streams of the Sarawak,
attacked a village, and brought off with them twenty-seven
heads of the unfortunate Dyaks. When the news
arrived, Mr. Brooke was so much enraged at their treachery,
that he almost determined upon sacrificing the boy
chief, as the natives expected; but not wishing to
visit the sins of the father upon the lad, who was
innocent, and fearful that his own people would not
be so forbearing, he returned the boy to his parents.
We all felt annoyed that we had not an opportunity
of bidding farewell to Mr. Brooke, and thanking him
for his kindness to us whenever he had an opportunity
of showing it. He was, indeed, beloved by every
body who had the pleasure of his acquaintance.
Sailed for Sincapore. The next
night we communicated with the Julia (Mr. Brooke’s
vessel). She had on board Captain Elliott, and
twenty-five sepoys, who were to be stationed as
a garrison at Kuchin. We were much pleased to
find that Government had taken up this cause so warmly,
and that Mr. Brooke was likely to be recognised by
it, after all his individual exertions. Our passage
to Sincapore proved very tedious, all hands upon short
allowance, and no grog. We touched at Barren Island,
and obtained a large quantity of sea birds’ eggs,
but they were mostly rotten; but this did not prevent
our making omelets of them, for we were now with only
three days’ provisions on board at half allowance,
and the calm still continued. Three days we were
in sight of the island, the sails flapped idly against
the masts, and not a breath disturbed the surface
of the ocean wave. We thought of the tale of the
Ancient Mariner, and there were not wanting those
on board who declared that this continued calm was
a judgment upon us, not for shooting an albatross,
but for robbing the nests of the eggs.
Our barges were sent to Sincapore
for provisions, for famine was staring us in the face,
but that same night a breeze sprang up, and on the
20th of May we dropped our anchor in the roads.
At Sincapore we found the Hazard, 18, whose crew suffered
so much at New Zealand; and here also we found, to
our inexpressible delight, our orders for England,
of which we had begun to have some doubts. On
the 14th of June arrived the Admiral, in H. M. S.
Agincourt, towed by the Spitfire steamer. As soon
as he was joined by the rest of the squadron, it was
the intention of Sir T. Cochrane to make sail for
Bruni, and punish the six-fingered sultan and his
piratical advisers.
Sincapore, like all new settlements,
is composed of so mixed a community, that there is
but little hospitality, and less gaiety. Every
one is waiting to ascertain what is to be his position
in society, and till then is afraid of committing
himself by friendly intercourse; moreover, every body
is too busy making money. The consequence is,
but few parties are given, and a ball is so rare that
it becomes the subject of conversation for months.
There are some good-looking girls at Sincapore, but
it is only at church or on parade that a stranger obtains
a glimpse of them. Prudery is at present the order
of the day, and this is carried to such an extent
from non-intercourse, that at a farewell ball given
to the Cambrians, the women would only polka and waltz
with each other.
The country immediately outside the
town of Sincapore is spotted with little bungaloes,
the retreat of the merchants from the monotonous business-life
which they are compelled to lead. The plantations
of nutmegs and beetle-nut which surround these country
residences are very luxuriant; and at this time the
fruit was on the trees, and the odour quite delightful.
One male tree is planted for every ten females.
Very little cloves or cinnamon are grown at this settlement,
but I saw some specimens. A nutmeg tree is valued,
when it once arrives to full bearing, at a guinea
a year. The Areca-palm is a very beautiful tree,
and requires but little attention: these and cocoa-nut
are valued at a dollar per year. Large quantities
of sugar-cane are now grown here, and some fine sugar-mills
are built in the vicinity of the town. The roads
are kept in good repair by the convicts, and are now
really very respectable.
The Chinese joss-house here is considered
very fine, and I made a drawing of it. It has
some good stone carving and figures, but is very inferior
to that of Ningpo. During the time that I was
drawing it was filled with Chinese, who were very
inquisitive and troublesome: the only method
I could devise for keeping them off was by filling
a bowl full of vermilion, and when their curiosity
overcame their prudence, and they came rubbing up
against me, daubing their faces with the colour this
plan, accompanied with a kick, proved effectual.
Sincapore being the penal settlement
of India, there are a large number of convicts here,
who are chained, and work at the roads and bridges.
One night I visited the gaol, and was taken over it
by an overseer. We first visited the Chinese
department. Two long benches ran along the room,
on which were stretched some thirty men. As the
overseer passed he struck each man with his rattan,
and in a moment they were all sitting up, rubbing
their eyes, and looking as innocent as possible.
They were all confined for murder, and were a most
rascally-looking set. From this room we proceeded
to another, fitted in the same manner, and filled with
Indians. Many of them were branded on the forehead
with “Doomga,” which signifies murder;
and in some cases the brand was both in Hindostanee
and English. Leaving them, we entered a small
room close to the gates of the gaol, and guarded by
a sentry. In this room were confined the most
reckless characters. They were but eight in number.
Parallel to the bench ran a long iron rod, and to
this they were shackled, both hands and feet.
The first man among them pointed out to me by the overseer
was a fine-looking grey-bearded Indian, of great stature,
and with the eyes of a tiger. He had been formerly
a rich shipowner at Bombay; but having been convicted
of insuring his vessels to a large amount, and then
setting fire to them, his property was confiscated
by the government, and he was sentenced to work for
life in chains. It is said that he has offered
a million rupees to any man who will knock off his
irons. His son carries on the business at Bombay,
and it was reported that a vessel was always lying
at Sincapore ready to receive him in case he should
effect his escape; but of this there does not appear
to be the slightest chance, as he is particularly
watched and guarded.
The next culprits pointed out to us
were two of the heads of the secret society of India.
So much has already been said of this extraordinary
association, that I need not discuss it here.
There is, however, a society in Sincapore of a similar
nature, composed of all the lower orders of the Chinese.
It is said to amount to 15,000; and the police is
much too weak to prevent the robberies, although some
check is put to them by the presence of the military.
It must not be supposed that because there are 15,000
in the society, that there are that quantity of robbers:
such is not the case. Of course it is difficult
to arrive at the regulations of any secret society,
but as far as can be collected, they are as follows.
A certain portion of the society are regular thieves,
and these in a body compel those who are inoffensive
to join the society, by threats of destruction of
property, &c. If the party joins the society,
all that is expected of him is, that he will aid and
assist to prevent the capture, and give an asylum to
any one of the society who may be in danger.
The richest Chinese merchants have been compelled
to join, and lend their countenance to this society,
upon pain of destruction of their property, and even
assassination, if they refuse; and as they have more
than once put their threats into execution, the merchants
have not the courage to resist. Shortly after
our arrival at Sincapore, the burial of one of the
chiefs of the society took place; and such was the
concourse assembled to witness the funeral, that it
was thought advisable to call out the troops, as a
skirmish was expected to take place. However,
every thing passed off quietly.
The richest Chinaman at Sincapore
is Whampoa: he supplies the navy with stores,
and has a thriving business. His country house
is a favourite resort of the naval officers, and he
gives excellent dinners, and very agreeable parties.
His champagne is particularly approved of.
There is little or no amusement at
Sincapore. During the afternoon every body is
asleep. In the cool of the evening half a dozen
palanquins, and perhaps a few gigs, may be seen
driving on the parade: these proceed at a steady
pace round the grass-plot for about an hour; and this
is the only exercise taken. Fashion is very drowsy
here, and only wakes up occasionally, that she may
sleep the longer afterwards. From the want of
hospitality, the evenings are passed by strangers at
the hotels, playing billiards, smoking, and drinking.
The hotels are very good, in consequence of the steamers
from Bombay to Hong Kong touching here; they are fitted
up with an unusual degree of comfort; and the charges
are, of course, not very moderate. The markets
are well supplied with fruit, vegetables, and stock
of all kinds. Among the fruits must be mentioned
the mangostein, which is brought from Malacca; and
the pine-apples from the island of St. John’s.
The opposite side of the island upon which Sincapore
is built is well wooded. A great many tigers swim
over from the main, and pits are dug for their destruction,
100 dollars being given by government for every tiger
killed.
On the 18th we received our final
orders, and took our farewell of Eastern India; but
it must not be supposed that we made the best of our
passage to England. On the contrary, the captain
was as anxious to remain out as we were to get home;
and we were six months and twelve days from the time
that we left Sincapore till our arrival at Portsmouth.
The fact was, that the pay and emoluments of a surveying
captain are such, that our captain felt no inclination
to be paid off; and as he never spent any money, he
was laying up a nice provision for his retirement;
besides which he hoped that, upon his representations
to the Admiralty, the order for his recall would be
cancelled, and that he would find a letter to that
effect at the Cape of Good Hope. His object,
therefore, was to spin out the time as much as possible,
so as to allow the answer of the Admiralty to arrive
at the Cape before we did. We were ordered to
survey some shoals, the Cagardos Carahos, on our passage
home; but I believe nothing more.
On Sunday, the 22d, we anchored off
a small island near to the isle of Billaton.
At two A. M. we weighed, and ten minutes afterwards
the ship struck on a shoal. All our exertions
to get her off proved abortive, and in this uncomfortable
position we remained till the following Thursday,
when she again floated, after throwing overboard the
guns, and landing such stores as we could on the island.
This accident and light winds lengthened our passage
to Anger (the Dutch settlement in Java) to twenty-one
days; and there we remained five days, to ascertain
the rate of our chronometers. This Dutch settlement
at Anger, although slightly fortified, might be made
a place of great consequence: both outward and
homeward bound vessels touch here for water and stock;
and were it properly supported and improved by the
Dutch, as it should be, it would command a great deal
of trade, and during war be of great consequence.
It is governed by a Dutch military officer, and is
garrisoned with about fifty soldiers. The country
is remarkably fine here, the plains richly cultivated
and covered with cattle. The farmers complain
bitterly of the taxes imposed upon them by the Dutch,
taxes so onerous that no native has a chance of realising
any profits of consequence; but this is Dutch policy,
and very unwise policy it is. We now thought that
we were about to proceed to the isle of France direct,
but we were mistaken: we weighed anchor, and
proceeded to the Cocoa islands. This is a low
group of islands literally covered with cocoa-nut
trees. These islands are possessed by a Mr. Ross,
formerly mate of a merchant vessel. His family
consisted of two sons and two daughters, and are the
only Europeans who reside there. We could not
help thinking that the Misses Ross had very little
chance of getting husbands. The remainder of the
population, amounting to about 120 souls, are all
black. They extract the oil from the cocoa-nut,
and trade with it to Java, from whence they procure
the necessary supplies. Whalers occasionally
call here to obtain fresh provisions; but the visit
of a man-of-war was quite an event.
From the Cocoas we steered for the
Cagardos Carahos shoals, where we remained for more
than a fortnight, surveying. There are several
islands close to these shoals, which are in the shape
of a crescent. They are very dangerous, being
in the direct track of ships from China and the Indies.
Indeed, we had ocular proof of their
dangerous position, for there were seven or eight
wrecks upon them, and the small islands of sand were
crowded with masts, spars, chests, interspersed with
human bones bleaching in the powerful sun. On
one of the islands we discovered the remains of the
British ship Letitia, which was wrecked in September,
1845. At a short distance from the beach was the
grave of the captain, who was drowned in attempting
to reach the shore with a bag of dollars. Had
he not held on so tight to the bag, he would in all
probability have been saved, as were all the rest
on board of her. It certainly would be very advisable
to build a lighthouse upon these shoals; the expense
would be nothing compared to the loss of property and
life which they occasion every year. From the
Cagardos Carahos we proceeded to the Mauritius.
Here we found the President, bearing the flag of Admiral
Dacres, and the Snake brig just arrived from England.
Port Louis has been too often described
to be mentioned here. Behind it rose a range
of mountains, the highest of which are about 1400 feet
above the level of the sea, and completely shelter
the town from the S. E. gales, which at this period
of the year blow with great violence. Among these
mountains is the famous Peter-Botte, and
we looked upon it with great interest, in consequence
of the daring and successful attempt made a few years
since by some Englishmen to attain the summit of it.
Even now, although we know that it has been done, it
appears to be impossible. One of the leaders
of this expedition was Lieutenant Thomas Keppel, the
brother of our favourite Captain Henry Keppel, and
this circumstance gave it more interest to us; but
T. Keppel has since left the service, and is now a
Reverend, moored in a snug Creek, and has quite
given over climbing up Peter-Bottes. During the
short time that we remained at this delightful island,
we received every kindness and attention from the
governor and his lady, and the officers of the two
regiments stationed there.
From the Mauritius we proceeded to
the Cape of Good Hope. On the morning of the
24th of September we hove in sight of the Table Mountain,
but it was not until the 26th that we cast anchor
in Simon’s Bay. Here we remained for a
month, waiting for the arrival of the mail from England.
At last it arrived, but not bringing us, as our captain
hoped, the order for his return to India, on the 24th
of October we made sail for England, and, calling
at St. Helena and Ascension en route, on the
last day of the year we dropped our anchor at Spithead.
We were not, however, emancipated till the 18th day
of January, on which day the ship was paid off, for
which, and all other mercies, may the Lord be praised!
OBSERVATIONS
UPON
THE EASTERN ARCHIPELAGO
It is with diffidence that I take
up my pen to offer a few remarks upon the prospects
afforded to our commerce and manufactures by the opening
of the Eastern Archipelago. Hitherto I have done
little more than narrate what I have seen, and have
seldom made any attempt to express what I have thought.
However, as my thoughts have been generated from what
I have observed, whether I am correct or not in my
opinions, I shall venture to lay them before my readers.
How it is that until lately we have
never taken any notice of this immense archipelago
it is difficult to say, unless we are to suppose that,
up to the present, the other portions of the inhabited
globe have been found sufficient to consume our manufactures
as fast as they could be produced. It does appear
strange that an assemblage of islands, which, large
and small, amounting to about 12,000 in number, equal
in territory to any continent, and so populous, for
the inhabitants, including the more northern islands,
are estimated at fifty millions, should have hitherto
been unnoticed, and, at all events, have not attracted
the attention of our government. Moreover, there
are such facilities of communication, not being compelled,
as with the Chinese, to confine ourselves to five
or six ports, at which the whole trade is centred
in the hands of a monopoly, taxed with the expences
of land-carriage, port duties, and other exactions.
Here, on the contrary, from the division of the territory
into so many portions, we possess all the advantages
of inland navigation, if I may use such a term, for
the straits and channels between them serve as large
rivers do on the continents to render the communication
with the interior easy and accessible. And yet,
although we have had possession of the East Indies
for so many years, this archipelago has been wholly
neglected. At all events, the discovery of it,
for it is really such, has come in good time, and
will give a stimulus to our manufactures, most opportune,
now that we have so much increased them, that we are
in want of customers. Still we have, almost unknown
to ourselves, been advancing towards it step by step.
The taking possession of the island of Sincapore was
the first and greatest stride towards it. Had
it not been that we had founded that settlement, we
probably should not have been nearer to Borneo now,
than we were fifty years ago. Sir T. Raffles conferred
a great boon upon this country, and is entitled to
its gratitude for pointing out the advantages which
would accrue from this possession. Till we had
made a settlement there, we knew no more of the eastern
archipelago, than what had been obtained by our circumnavigators,
or of the produce of it, further than that Borneo
was the country from which could be obtained the orang-outang.
Latterly we have been at some trouble
and expence in forcing our trade with China, little
aware that almost in the route to China we had an
opening for commerce, which, in a few years, judiciously
managed, will become by far the most lucrative of
the two, and what perhaps is still more important,
may be the means of a most extended trade with China,
as we can drive the Chinese from the archipelago,
and supply China from them ourselves; but of that
hereafter.
One cause, perhaps, which has prevented
us from turning our attention in this direction has
been, an unwillingness to interfere with the Dutch,
who have been supposed to have been in possession of
all the valuable islands in the archipelago, and from
long-standing to have a prior right to this portion
of the East; but, although the Dutch have not been
idle, and are gradually adding to their possessions,
there is little chance of our interfering with them,
as there is room, and more, for the Dutch, ourselves,
and every other nation which may feel inclined to compete
with us. The possessions of the Dutch are but
a mere strip in this immense field; and, although
it is true that they have settlements on the Spice
Islands, so named, yet we now know that every one of
these islands may be made spice islands, if the inhabitants
are stimulated by commerce to produce these articles
of trade.
It was the settlement at Sincapore
which first gave us a notion of the trade which might
be carried on with this archipelago. Every year
large fleets of prahus have come up to Sincapore laden
with commodities for barter, and have taken in exchange
European goods to a certain extent; but their chief
object has been to obtain gunpowder and shot, to carry
on their piratical expeditions. In fact, they
are traders when they can only obtain what they want
by exchange; but when they can obtain it by force,
they then change their character, and become pirates.
But our possession of Labuan has brought us about
eight hundred miles nearer to these people, and enables
us to take more effectual steps towards the suppression
of piracy than we have hitherto done; for this we may
lay down as an axiom, that we never shall reap the
advantages promised to us by commerce in this archipelago
till we have most effectually put an end to the piracy
which has existed in these quarters for centuries.
Before I go on, I cannot help here observing how much
this country is indebted to Mr. Brooke for his unwearied
exertions in the cause of humanity, and his skilful
arrangements. It is to be hoped, that our gratitude
to him will be in proportion, and that Her Majesty’s
ministers will, in their distribution of honour and
emoluments among those who have served them, not forget
to bestow some upon one who has so well served his
country.
The largest, and perhaps the most
important of the islands in this archipelago, although
at present the most barbarous, and the most hostile
to us, is that of Papua, or New Guinea. The inhabitants
are as well inclined to commerce as the other natives
of the archipelago, and do at present carry on a considerable
trade with the Chinese, who repair there every year
in their junks, which they fill with valuable cargoes
adapted for the Chinese market. The Chinese have
found the trade with New Guinea so lucrative, that
they are doing all that they can to secure the monopoly
of it, and with this view take every occasion, and
do all that they possibly can, to blacken the character
of the Europeans in the minds of the inhabitants.
It is to this cause that the Papuan’s hostility
to Europeans, and especially to the English, is to
be ascribed; and before we have any chance of commerce
with this people, it is necessary that the Chinese
should be driven away from the island, that they may
no longer injure us by their malicious fabrications.
This will be but a just retribution for the falsehoods
and lies which they have circulated to our disadvantage.
And there is another reason why we should be little
scrupulous in taking this measure, which is, that one
of their principal articles of commerce with the Papuans
consists in slaves, which are taken on board by the
Chinese, and sold at Borneo, and the adjacent islands
of the archipelago, at a great profit. To obtain
these slaves, the Chinese stimulate the Papuan tribes
to war with each other, as is done for the same purpose
in Africa. As this traffic is very considerable,
and we are as much bound to put down the slave trade
in the east as in the west, we have full warrant for
driving their junks away, and, by so doing, there
is little doubt but that in a few years we shall secure
all the valuable trade of this island to ourselves.
Borneo is, however, the island (or
continent) to which our first attention will be particularly
devoted. Up to the present we know little of
it except its coasts and a portion of its rivers; but
it is here that our principal attention must be given,
as in its rivers and the island of Sooloo the chief
piratical hordes exist. We have already had some
sharp conflicts with them, and have given them some
severe lessons; but although we have given them a
momentary check, and some idea of our immense superiority,
we must not imagine that two or three successful conflicts
are sufficient to put an end to a system which has
been carried on for centuries, and which is so universal,
that the whole of the present generation may be said
to have been “born pirates.” In fact,
we shall be compelled to subdue them wholly, to destroy
them in all their fastnesses, to leave them without
a prahu in their possession, to depose or confine
their chiefs, to destroy their forts, and to carry
on a war of extermination for some years, before we
shall put down the piratical system which at present
exists. It is not quite so easy a task as may
be imagined to reform so many millions of people:
for it must be remembered that it is not only at Borneo
that we shall have to act, but that we must destroy
the power of the sultan of Sooloo, and other tribes
who frequent other islands, and who follow the same
profession. It must not be forgotten that one
of the principal objects of these piratical excursions
is to procure slaves for sale at other ports; and perhaps
this is by far the most profitable part of the speculation.
As long as there is no security for the person, commerce
must languish, and be proportionably checked.
In putting down these marauders, we are, therefore,
putting down the slave trade as with the Chinese at
New Guinea. The sooner that this is effected
the better; and to do it effectually we should have
a large force at Labuan, ready to act with decision.
Let it be remembered that, with people so crafty and
so cruel as the Malays and descendants of the Arabs,
lenity is misplaced, and is ascribed to cowardice.
No half measures will succeed with them. Indeed,
I have my doubts whether it will not be necessary to
destroy almost every prahu in the archipelago, and
compel the natives to remain on their territory, to
cultivate or collect articles for barter, before we
shall effect our purpose; for the prahu that sails
as a trader is changed into a pirate as soon as temptation
rises on her way. Indeed, if Labuan becomes,
as it will probably be, an emporium and depot for
European commerce, without such stringent measures
a great stimulus would be given to piracy. The
peaceable trading parties, on their return, would
be laid in wait for by the piratical prahus, and the
English manufactures on board would be so tempting,
and such a source of wealth, that they would be irresistible.
Neither should we be able to afford any protection
to the traders, as they would be laid in wait for
at the mouths or up the rivers, and would be captured
without our knowledge; with this difference, perhaps,
that the fear of detection would induce them to murder
all the prisoners, instead of selling them as slaves,
as they do at present. Unless, therefore, the
most stringent measures are resorted to on our parts,
an increase of commerce with this archipelago would
only occasion in a reciprocal ratio an increase of
piracy.
The occupation of Labuan and Sarawak
will, I should imagine, prove hardly sufficient to
effect the important change to be desired, i. e.
that of the total suppression of piracy. Stations,
with forts, must be established at the mouths of the
principal rivers, that we may have a constant watch
upon the movements of the occupants. In so doing
we should be only encroaching upon those who have
encroached upon others: these rivers have been
taken forcible possession of by the Malays and Arabs,
who have driven away the proprietors of the soil, which
are the Dyaks, the aborigines of the island; and they
have no more right to the possessions which they hold,
than their chiefs have to the high-sounding titles
which they have assumed. That in taking this step
we shall interfere with no vested rights is certain:
we shall merely be dispossessing these piratical marauders
of their strongholds; and the cause of humanity will
sufficiently warrant such interference on our parts.
In our first attempts to establish,
a peaceful and secure commerce with this archipelago,
it appears to me that it would be advisable for the
Government to take some share in the venture.
Ten or twelve schooners, well manned, confided
to intelligent officers, and armed with one heavy
gun, and swivels in the gunwales, should sail for Labuan,
with assorted cargoes, with the view of both trading
and checking piracy. Much depends upon the way
in which the barter is first commenced, and it would
be as well that it should not be left in the hands
of adventurers, whose mercenary feelings might induce
them to excite doubt or irritation in the minds of
the natives, and, by such means, do great mischief,
and impede the trade. The constant appearance
of these vessels in the archipelago, the knowledge
that they were sent, not only to barter, but also
to protect the well-disposed against violence and rapine,
would soon produce most beneficial effects, and would
impose confidence. Merchant vessels which entered
the trade should be empowered, by letters of marque,
to put down piracy, and should be armed in a similar
way. Although there is little doubt but that
in a short time vessels would sail from Labuan with
full cargoes for Europe, still it is more than probable
that the most important part of the trade, and which
would employ most vessels, would be the colonial trade,
or rather, country trade, to the several marts in
the Indus and China. There are many productions
of the archipelago which are only valued in the East,
such as bêche-de-mer, or trepang; edible
birds’ nests, &c. This trade we might very
soon monopolise to ourselves, and a most lucrative
one it would prove. The following are the articles
to be found in more or less quantities over the whole
of the Indian archipelago: Antimony, tin,
gold, diamonds, pearls, sapphires, ivory, gums, camphor,
sago, pepper, tortoise-shell, mother-of-pearl, skins,
wax, honey, cocoa-nut oil, coffee, rice, and coal,
edible birds’ nests and trepang; all the varieties
of spices, as cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, can be grown
as soon as there is a market for them; the cotton
tree nourishes; and, although not yet worked, it is
proved that there is abundance of copper and lead.
An archipelago containing such rich productions, and
which we may, with some little trouble, receive in
exchange for our manufactures, becomes a national
concern, and it is the paramount duty of the Government
to take every measure to facilitate the communication
with it.
The expedition of Mr. Murray to the
river Coti, on the south side of Borneo, although,
from imprudence, it ended not only unsuccessfully but
tragically, fully establishes that an opening for commerce
is to be established. In this expedition Mr.
Murray, by his imprudence and unguarded conduct, brought
upon himself the attack of the natives, in which he
lost his own life, and the vessels with great difficulty
escaped. Since that failure, no English vessels
have attempted to trade to the south of Borneo; but
we discovered that the Macassar boats paid the coast
an occasional visit, under Dutch colours, exchanging
beads and other trumpery for rich cargoes of ivory
and skins. We also discovered that commercial
negotiations with this country would not be attended
with any risk, provided that the vessels employed were
well armed, and the arrangements were so made as not
to excite the jealousy and suspicion of the natives.
European manufactures would be eagerly
purchased by the natives, and would be paid for in
ivory, rough ores, or dollars. Mr. Wyndham, who
has settled at Sooloo, has already sent a vessel to
trade on the south-east side of the island, near Gonong
Tabor.
So much for the southern portion of
this immense archipelago. We have still to examine
the more northern. Indeed, when we look upon the
map, and see the quantity of territory with which
we may eventually find the means of trading, the
millions who, but for the jealousy of the governments,
would be glad to receive our manufactures, we
are lost in conjecture as to what extent it might
eventually be driven. In the north we should
certainly have more difficulties to contend with; and
it will require that the whole of the naval force
in India should be, for a time, devoted to this object.
I believe it is as much from their utter ignorance
of our power, as from any other cause, that we have
hitherto been so unsuccessful at Japan; but the object
we have in view may be effected, provided that a certain
degree of the fortiter in re be combined with
the suaviter in modo. The Japanese now
carry on a large trade with China, and also a confined
trade with the Dutch, to whom they have allowed a
factory upon a small island; but they treat the Dutch
with the greatest indignity, and the Dutch submit to
it, and, in so doing, have rendered the Europeans
vile in the estimation of the Japanese. This
is the error which must be destroyed by some means
or other, even if it should be necessary to pick a
quarrel with them, as we have already done with the
Chinese. At the same time that I admit the expediency
of so doing, I by no means assert that we shall be
altogether justified.
There is another point worthy of consideration,
which is, that a whale fishery depot might be made
with great success in this archipelago, any where
to the southward and eastward; and we might recover
a large portion of that lucrative employment, which,
by the means of British seamen employed in American
vessels, has been wrested from us; for although, at
the commencement, the whale fishery from the States
was carried on by Americans only, since it has so
enormously increased, at least two-thirds of the people
employed in the vessels are English seamen, who have
become expert in the profession. It is much to
be lamented that the laudable exertions of Mr. Enderby
and others to revive this lucrative employment for
our vessels and seamen has hitherto failed, and that
some part of our surplus capital has not been devoted
to an object so important to us as a maritime country.
I shall conclude with a reflection
which I made while I was on the coast, leaving the
reader to agree with me or not, as he may be disposed.
How is it, as I have already observed, that all the
colonies founded by other nations, either languish
or have been swept away, not all, perhaps,
as yet, but the major portion of them; while every
colony founded by our little island appears to flourish,
till it becomes so powerful as not only no longer
to require the nursing of the mother country, but
to throw off its dependence, and become a nation of
itself? How is it that it can so truly be said
that the sun never sets upon the English flag?
It cannot be from any want of energy, or activity,
or intelligence, or judgment in other nations; for
surely in these qualifications we are not superior
to the French or to the Dutch, although we may be
to the present race of Spaniards and Portuguese.
Our colonies have not been more carefully fostered
than theirs: on the contrary, they have been
neglected, and, if not neglected, they have been but
too often oppressed. Why, then, should this be?
Can religion have any thing to do with this?
Can it be that Providence has imperceptibly interfered,
and has decided that England shall perform the high
mission; that she has been selected, as a chosen country,
to fill the whole world with the true faith, with
the pure worship of the Almighty? Has it been
for this object that we have been supported in our
maritime superiority? Has it been with this view
that we have been permitted to discomfit the navies
of the whole world? May it not be that when our
naval commanders, with a due regard to propriety, have
commenced their despatches with “It has pleased
the Almighty to grant us a splendid victory,”
at the same time that they were trusting to the arms
of flesh and blood which have so well supported their
endeavours, and in their hearts ascribed their successes
to the prowess of man, may it not be, I
say, that the Almighty has, for his own good reasons,
fought on our side, and has given us victory upon victory,
until we have swept the seas, and made the name of
England known to the uttermost corners of the globe?
Has this been granted us, and have we really been
selected as a favoured nation to spread the pure light
of the gospel over the universe? Who can say?
“His ways are not our ways;” but if so,
it is a high destiny, which we must act up to at every
sacrifice and at every expence.